diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/67438-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/67438-0.txt | 8332 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8332 deletions
diff --git a/old/67438-0.txt b/old/67438-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 9a15eb0..0000000 --- a/old/67438-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8332 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of A United States Midshipman in the -Philippines, by Yates Stirling, Jr. - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: A United States Midshipman in the Philippines - -Author: Yates Stirling, Jr. - -Illustrator: Ralph L. Boyer - -Release Date: February 18, 2022 [eBook #67438] - -Language: English - -Produced by: D A Alexander, David E. Brown, University of Michigan for - the original scans and the color image of the cover, and - the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at - https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images - generously made available by the Library of Congress.) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN -THE PHILIPPINES *** - - -[Illustration: _SOME ONE TURNED ON THE CURRENT_] - - - - - A - UNITED STATES - MIDSHIPMAN - IN THE - PHILIPPINES - - _by_ - - Lt. Com. Yates Stirling Jr. U.S.N. - - Author of - - “A U.S. Midshipman Afloat” - “A U.S. Midshipman in China” - “A U.S. Midshipman in Japan” - “A U.S. Midshipman in the South Seas” - - [Illustration] - - Illustrated _by_ Ralph L. Boyer - - THE PENN PUBLISHING - COMPANY PHILADELPHIA - MCMXIII - - - - - COPYRIGHT - 1910 BY - THE PENN - PUBLISHING - COMPANY - - [Illustration] - - - - -Introduction - - -The writer has attempted to describe in this volume the life of two -young midshipmen of the United States Navy, serving in a small gunboat -in Philippine waters. - -The fighting between the United States troops and the lawless bands -of Filipino bandits (for they were bandits, more or less, after -Aguinaldo’s army had been dispersed) was in most cases “hand to hand” -and to the death. The navy had but small share in this war, but in some -instances the helpful coöperation of their web-footed brothers saved -the soldiers from embarrassing situations. - -Midshipman Philip Perry and his classmate at Annapolis, Sydney Monroe, -first made their appearance in “A United States Midshipman Afloat.” -They had a part in stirring adventures during one of the frequent South -American revolutions. Here they became involved in diplomatic intrigue, -and had some success; but unfortunately diplomatic successes cannot -always be proclaimed to the world. - -“A United States Midshipman in China” told of the adventures of the -same boys in China during a threatened uprising of fanatical Chinese -against the foreigners. Here again diplomacy counseled silence, and -their reward for saving the day was a mild rebuke from their admiral. -One of the principal characters in all three books is Jack O’Neil, a -typical modern man-of-war’s man. - -These books are written in an endeavor to portray the life led by young -officers in the naval service. The writer’s own experiences warrant -the belief that the incidents are not unusual. The midshipmen are not -merely automatons. To one of Napoleon’s pawns an order was an order, -to be obeyed, right or wrong. But the doctrine, “their’s not to reason -why” when “some one has blundered” is no longer accepted as an excuse -for poor results. In these days of progress we court-martial an officer -who stubbornly obeys an order, when he knows that to do so will injure -the cause he has sworn to uphold. - -Further account of the boys’ stirring adventures will be found in “A U. -S. Midshipman in Japan” and “A U. S. Midshipman in the South Seas.” - - - - -Contents - - - I. THE START FOR PALILO 9 - - II. A POLITE CAPTOR 25 - - III. A LEAK OF MILITARY INFORMATION 41 - - IV. LANDED IN CAPTIVITY 54 - - V. CAPTAIN BLYNN MARCHES 71 - - VI. THE “MINDINAO” 83 - - VII. THE GUNBOAT COÖPERATES 101 - - VIII. THE PRIVILEGES OF RANK 119 - - IX. THE KATIPUNAN SOCIETY 138 - - X. IN THE SHADOW OF A SUSPICION 158 - - XI. A TRAITOR UNMASKED 175 - - XII. THE MIDSHIPMEN RECONNOITRE 189 - - XIII. UNWELCOME COMPANIONS 212 - - XIV. CLEVERLY OUTWITTED 225 - - XV. A NIGHT OF ALARM 241 - - XVI. A FILIPINO MARTYR 259 - - XVII. A DARING PLAN 277 - - XVIII. A RIVER EXPEDITION 292 - - XIX. A WILLING CAPTIVE 308 - - XX. THE STRUGGLE FOR THE STRONGHOLD 324 - - XXI. THE GUNBOAT TAKES A HAND 336 - - XXII. THE ESCAPED OUTLAW 346 - - XXIII. COLONEL MARTINEZ 355 - - XXIV. THE GUNBOAT ON GUARD 366 - - XXV. CONCLUSION 377 - - - - -Illustrations - - - PAGE - - SOME ONE TURNED ON THE CURRENT _Frontispiece_ - - HERE WAS FREEDOM WITHIN HIS GRASP 69 - - “I AM IN COMMAND HERE!” 126 - - “HELLO, HERE ARE SOME CANOES!” 205 - - UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF 288 - - HE GAZED DOWN INTO THE STILL FACE 333 - - A MAN STEPPED SILENTLY FROM BEHIND A TREE 356 - - - - -A United States Midshipman In the Philippines - - - - -CHAPTER I - -THE START FOR PALILO - - -The “Isla de Negros,” a small inter-island steamer, lay moored -alongside the dock in the turbulent waters of the Pasig River, the -commercial artery of the city of Manila. As the last of its cargo was -noisily carried on board by a swarm of half-naked stevedores, the -slender lines which held the steamer to the stone quay were cast off, -and with many shrill screeches from its high treble whistle the steamer -swung its blunt bow out into the strength of the current. - -On the upper deck of the vessel, clad in white naval uniforms, two -United States midshipmen stood in silent contemplation of the activity -about them. They watched with undisguised interest the hundreds -of toiling orientals; resembling many ant swarms, traveling and -retraveling incessantly between the countless hulls of steamers and -lorchas and the long rows of hastily constructed storehouses facing -the river frontage. Here and there stood a khaki-clad sentry, rifle -in hand and belt filled with ball cartridges, America’s guardian of -the precious stores now being idly collected. Into these spacious -storehouses the sinews of war for the army of occupation were being -hoarded to be afterward redistributed among the small steamers plying -between the metropolis, Manila, and the outlying islands of the -archipelago. - -The American army in the Philippines, always too small for the -stupendous task before it, was at last, owing to the added disaffection -of the tribes in the Southern islands, receiving the attention from -home which had long been withheld, and its numbers were being increased -by the arrival of every transport from the far-away homeland. - -“We are here at last, Syd,” Midshipman Philip Perry exclaimed, a ring -of triumph in his voice as he turned toward his fellow midshipman, -Sydney Monroe. Friends of long standing were these two; for four -years at the Naval Academy at Annapolis they had been companions and -classmates, and during the past year they had together witnessed -stirring service in South America and in China. - -“We’ve missed nearly six months of the war,” Sydney replied -querulously; “from the last accounts, Aguinaldo is on the run. Why,” -he ended mirthlessly, “the war may be over before we even see the -‘Mindinao.’” - -“Pessimistic as usual,” Phil laughingly retorted; “where we are going, -in the words of the immortal John Paul Jones, they ‘haven’t begun to -fight.’” - -The steamer had now swung her bow down river, and the chug of the -engines told the lads that they were fairly started on their voyage -to Palilo, the capital of the island of Kapay, where the gunboat -“Mindinao” was awaiting them. - -“Hello, what’s this?” Phil exclaimed, while the engine bell rang with -throaty clanks, and the chugging of the engines ceased. The two lads -leaning inquiringly over the rail, saw a small navy launch steam -alongside the moving steamer; then a tightly lashed bag and hammock -were thrown on deck, and finally from the depths of the white canopied -awning there appeared the familiar form of a sailor, who sprang nimbly -on board, waving a parting good-bye to his mates, while the launch -swung away; and again the “Negros’” engines chugged noisily. - -“Jack O’Neil!” the two lads cried, their faces beaming with surprised -pleasure as they grasped the newcomer’s hand. - -“It’s me, sir,” the sailor declared ungrammatically though heartily, -highly delighted at his enthusiastic reception. “Telegraphic orders -from the admiral to report to Midshipman Perry, commanding the gunboat -‘Mindinao.’” - -“But where’s your old ship, the ‘Monadnock’?” Sydney questioned -blankly. “We looked for her this morning as we came in on the cattle -boat from Hongkong. Is she in the bay?” - -“Sure, sir, she is,” returned O’Neil, “over there at Paranaque keeping -the ladrones out of the navy-yard with her ten-inch guns. They made a -rush for it once, about six months ago, then the gugus had an army -and we were kept guessing; but a few brace of hot ten-inch birds, -exploding near them from our coffee kettle of a monitor soon made -’em change their minds. They decided they hadn’t lost nothing at the -navy-yard after all. But,” he ended, the enthusiasm dying out of his -voice, “that, I said, was six months ago; we’ve been bailing out there -ever since, awnings furled, guns loaded, expecting to be boarded every -night.” He made a gesture of utter disgust as he stopped. - -“They don’t know anything, these gugus,” he began again, seeing that -his friends didn’t understand his disjointed explanation; “they won’t -try to board a man-of-war. They’ll attack you on shore; but as for -paddling out in their canoes to capture a steel monitor, it’s too -absurd. Yet we stood watch on and watch off every night waiting for -’em to board. Do you blame me, sir, for feeling happy when I got these -orders?” tapping his telegram against an awning stanchion. “This means -life again; like we had in the dago country and up with them pigtailed -chinks.” - -The midshipmen slapped the loquacious sailor joyfully on the back. - -“You’re not half as glad to be with us as we are to have you,” Phil -exclaimed frankly. “We’re just aching for something worth while--we’ve -been roasting up on the Yangtse River since you left us, doing nothing -except watch the grass burn up and the water in the river fall. I never -felt such heat.” - -While the Americans were talking the little steamer slipped noisily -down the busy river and out on the bay made famous by Admiral Dewey on -that memorable May morning. - -Corregidor Island lifted itself slowly out of a molten sea to the -westward. The “Negros’” bow was pointed out through the southern -channel, passing close to the precipitous island, standing like an -unbending sentinel on guard between the wide portals of the Bay of -Manila. - -“A few guns over there on Corregidor would soon stop this talk of -our waking up some morning and finding Manila at the mercy of an -enemy,” Phil declared after studying the landscape earnestly. “But -these islands are too far away for our people at home to take much -interest. Half of them would be glad to see another nation wrest them -from us.--Hello! there’s one of those native lorchas,”[1] he added as -his keen eye discovered a sail some miles away almost ahead of their -steamer; “we passed one coming in this morning on the ‘Rubi.’ I looked -at her through the captain’s spy-glass; her crew were the ugliest -looking cutthroats I’ve ever seen. They reminded me of that picture -‘Revenge.’ Do you know it?” he asked suddenly turning to Sydney, and -then describing the picture in mock tragic tones: “A half score of -scowling Malays, in the bow of their ‘Vinta’; their curved swords in -their mouths and their evil faces lustful with passion and hope of -blood, approaching their defenseless victims. I hope the captain gives -them a wide berth, for I haven’t even a revolver.” - -The Americans had so far discovered but few people on board the -steamer; the captain and pilot were on the bridge while on the lower -decks there were scarcely a dozen lazy natives, listlessly cleaning the -soiled decks and coiling up the confused roping. - -“Do you think we are the only passengers?” Sydney asked as they entered -their stateroom to make ready for the evening meal. - -Phil shook his head. - -“No, there must be others, for I heard a woman’s voice in a cabin near -ours.” - -As they again emerged on deck and walked aft to where their steamer -chairs had been placed, a young Filipino girl rose from her seat -and bowed courteously to the two young officers. Phil noticed as he -saluted that she was a remarkably pretty girl of the higher class -dressed in becoming native costume, and from her dark eyes there shone -intelligence and knowledge. - -“Have I one of the señor’s chairs?” she asked in excellent Spanish. “It -was very stupid of me to have forgotten mine.” - -Both lads remarked at once the air of good breeding and the pleasing -voice; the guttural lisp so common in the Malay was lacking. She could -not have appeared more at her ease and yet they saw by her dark skin -and straight black hair that no other blood than the native flowed in -her veins. - -“This is my small brother,” she explained as a slight lad of about -seven came toward them from behind a small boat, resting on the skids -of the upper deck. “He is my only companion,” she added half shyly. - -The midshipmen were at a loss how to talk to this girl of an alien -race. If her skin had been fair they would have welcomed her gladly, -seeing before them a pleasant two days of companionship before they -would arrive at their destination; but she belonged to a race whose -color they had been taught to believe placed her on a social footing -far beneath their own. - -The girl seemed to divine the hesitancy in the midshipmen’s manner, and -for a second a slight flush spread over her dark cheeks. - -Phil was the first to recover and break the embarrassing silence, -heartily ashamed of himself for his boorish manner. - -“We are glad, señorita,” he commenced haltingly in Spanish which had -become rusty through lack of practice, “to have you use our chairs, and -also,” he ended lamely, “to have you with us. I fear we are the only -passengers.” - -A few moments later a servant announced dinner, and the four took -their seats at a table spread on the upper deck after the custom of the -tropics. - -“The captain will not be with us,” the girl explained as Phil’s eyes -rested inquiringly on the seat at the head of the table; “he begs that -we will excuse him, for he is navigating the ship through the entrance -to the bay.” - -They sat down in silence; Phil’s seat was next to this remarkable girl. - -In a few moments both lads had quite forgotten that her skin was dark, -so skilfully did she preside over the plentiful board, attentive to -their wants with the natural grace of one accustomed to dispense -hospitality. - -“Juan and I are on our way to Palilo to join our father,” she explained -after the meal had fairly started. “I am very much concerned over -the bad news I have heard. Oh! I hope we shall not have war in our -beautiful island,” she added appealingly, “but the Filipinos are so -ignorant; they will follow blindly where they are led, and so many of -our educated men are at heart bad.” - -“There has been some fighting there already?” Phil questioned. - -“Yes,” she answered, “but it has been only guerilla warfare so far. My -father fears that reinforcements may come from the north. The natives -in Luzon are of the Tagalo race, and if they come after being driven -from their island by the American troops, we shall have the horrors of -war on Kapay.” - -The midshipmen’s eyes sparkled; they were just about to express their -delight at this possibility when they suddenly realized that she was of -the same blood as those they were wishing to fight. - -Phil was the first to see the reproving look in the girl’s eyes. - -“You must not blame us, señorita,” he hastened to say apologetically. -“You see fighting is our business; we look for it the same as a -merchant looks for trade or a fisherman for fish.” - -“I think your ideas are wrong, señor,” she replied quickly, but in a -caressing tone, to soften the sting. “Your duty is not necessarily -to fight, but to prevent fighting. The sisters in the convent taught -us that a soldier’s duty was to uphold the honor of his country. If -fighting only will accomplish this duty, then it is just to fight, but -in this case no honor is at stake. How can our people hurt the honor of -a great nation like yours?” - -Phil blushed half angrily, half in shame. This girl of a dark race had -the temerity to tell him what was his duty, and he was defenseless, for -she was in the right. - -“It is true, señorita, what you say,” Sydney came to the rescue, “but -peace for us is very monotonous, always the same eternal grind. War is -exciting; it stirs the blood and makes men of us.” - -“Yes, señor,” the girl answered in a low, hard voice, “and it arouses -all the evil passions in us. We forget all our training, all our -ideals, all our instincts for good, and give way to the instincts of -the beasts. My people in war are not men, señor, they are demons.” - -While the girl was talking the steamer had drawn closer to the lorcha -which Phil had sighted earlier in the afternoon. The night was not -bright; a crescent moon cast a dim light on the hull scarcely a hundred -yards on the weather bow. The breeze had freshened, and with wind free -the lorcha’s sails bellied out, giving it a speed almost equal to that -of the steamer. - -“Why doesn’t he give that sail a wider berth?” Phil exclaimed suddenly -as the girl’s voice died away. “If she should yaw now, she’d be into -us.” - -“Look out!” Sydney cried in alarm as the lorcha suddenly sheered to -leeward and the great mass of tautening canvas careened toward the -unsuspecting steamer. - -The midshipmen were on their feet in an instant, while O’Neil came -running up from the deck below. - -The Spanish captain, calling loudly to all his saints to witness that -it was not his fault, jammed the helm to starboard, throwing the -steamer’s bow away from the rapidly approaching lorcha. The engine bell -clanked riotously, as the excited Spanish captain rang for more speed. -Then the Americans’ blood froze in their veins, for the chugging of -the noisy engines had ceased in a wheezy wail, and the “Negros” lay -helpless, almost motionless in the path of the strange sail to windward. - -The lads looked at each other in consternation. The suddenness of the -emergency had rendered them powerless to act. - -“Was it only a stupid blunder? Or was it by design that the silent -lorcha had shifted its helm and stood down upon the demoralized -steamer?” were the questions that came into their minds. - -A guttural hail from the lorcha accompanied by a fusillade of -rifle-shots put an end to all doubt. - -“Pirates!” O’Neil gasped as he dislodged an iron crowbar from a boat -skid. “And there isn’t a gun among us.” - -A bright glare suddenly darted from the bridge of the steamer as some -one turned on the current for the search-light, and the Americans saw -in the bright beam a motley crew of natives lining the lorcha’s rail, -their eager bodies crouched ready to spring upon the deck of their -helpless victim. - -“Tagalos,” the girl cried out in sudden alarm as she instinctively put -her small brother behind her, shielding him from the flying bullets. - -“Don’t do it, sir,” O’Neil commanded hoarsely as Phil started -precipitously forward. “We can’t stand them off, we’re too few. Here -we can make a stand if they attack us. We can’t save the ship.” - -The lads saw at once the wisdom in O’Neil’s advice. No power could save -the ship from the terrible onslaught of that savage horde. The two -vessels came together with a mighty crash, and the air was rent with -harsh cries of triumph as the captors leaped on board, firing their -guns and slashing with their sharp bolos. The cries for mercy from the -cringing crew were soon swallowed up in the shrieks of pain and anger -as the vengeful victors satisfied their inherent love for blood. - -The triumphant natives scaled the bridge deck, and in the bright glow -from the search-light, the Americans were horrified to see those on the -bridge, in spite of their hands held aloft in supplication, cruelly -butchered where they stood. - -The Americans in mortal dread pressed their bodies close within the -deep shadow of the boats. The blinding glare from the search-light -aided them in their attempt to hide from the searching eyes of their -assailants. Phil and Sydney had manfully lifted the native girl and -her brother into the boat behind them and stood their ground ready to -protect them with their lives. So this was to be the end of their hopes -for adventure?--to be butchered, unarmed and in cold blood by a band of -lawless murderers. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -A POLITE CAPTOR - - -The Americans were not kept long in suspense, although to the anxious -boys, huddled helplessly in the shadow of the boat, the time seemed -hours until the victorious and jubilant natives moved aft, bent on -annihilating those whom they believed were hiding from their search. - -O’Neil grasped his weapon firmly, while the lads made a mental resolve -to seize the arms of the first natives within reach and sacrifice their -own lives as dearly as possible. - -Suddenly the beam of the search-light swung directly aft, revealing to -the pirates the defenseless band of spectators to the recent tragedy. - -The helpless passengers were confident now that all was over. As if in -broad daylight, they were visible to the outlaws. A volley from their -rifles would send them all to death. - -Blinded by the bright light, they could but speculate as to the -movement of their enemies, but they well knew that they must surely be -advancing slowly, only awaiting the word to throw themselves on their -helpless victims. - -What could be done? Phil realized only too vividly that something must -be done and quickly. A false move would condemn them all. Once those -wild men, steeped in the blood of the innocent, had commenced, even the -power of their leader could not stop them. - -Then a girl’s voice, clear and commanding from behind them, made the -Americans gasp in wonder. O’Neil with his great club raised to strike -the misty figures just beyond his reach stiffened. The girl’s words -were unintelligible to the Americans, but to the advancing natives they -were like a flash of lightning from out of a clear sky. They stopped -short, and for a few seconds a deep silence reigned. The girl was -speaking in her native tongue. Phil cast a swift glance behind him; she -stood boldly upright in the bow of the boat, like a beautiful bronze -statue. The light threw her face in high relief against the black -background of sky. He saw the flashing eyes, the quivering straight -nostrils, and the scornful curve of her mouth. She finished speaking, -and still the silence was unbroken. From the gathered crowd the leader -advanced, his hand held above his head in mute sign of peace. Phil -could scarcely believe his eyes, but the girl’s low voice in his ear -caused his heart to beat tumultuously. - -“He has accepted your surrender.” She spoke in Spanish. Then, with her -hands placed lightly on Phil’s shoulder she jumped down to the deck and -advanced to meet the native leader. At a few paces from her he halted, -and the Americans held their breath in wonder to see the bandit bow -low before her, raising her hand to his lips. Then he turned and gave -several harsh commands to his followers, who quietly dispersed. - -Inside of but a few minutes the lorcha had disappeared in the night and -the “Negros” resumed its journey, the noisy engines chugging away just -as faithfully under their new masters. - -The Americans, as they gathered about the table to finish the meal long -forgotten in the excitement of the attack, marveled at the outcome of -the affair. - -“Who can she be?” Sydney whispered. “Why, she orders the ladrone leader -around as if she were a princess.” - -Phil was about to reply when the girl herself appeared from the -shadows, followed by the native chief. - -The lads regarded him with a mixture of feelings, admiration for his -soldierly bearing and disgust at the thought of the wilful butchery -they had seen him permit on the bridge of the steamer. - -They recognized at once that these two were of the highest caste among -their people. The man’s face, almost perfect in contour, except in the -cruel lines of the mouth, beamed hospitably upon them. - -The girl spoke quickly, breathlessly. - -“Colonel Martinez wishes to meet the brave Americans who would have -fought unarmed against overwhelming odds and who had no thoughts of -asking for quarter.” - -The Americans bowed, but the Filipino advanced, his hand outstretched. -Phil took it with almost a shudder. Why had this hand been withheld -while the Spanish captain and his officers were asking for mercy -scarcely five minutes before? Yet he knew that he had no choice but to -take the proffered fingers; he and his companions were in the power of -this man, the lines of whose mouth told what might happen if the native -leader’s pride was offended. - -After shaking hands, Colonel Martinez went straight to the point. “You -belong to the country of our enemy, and being such you must remain -prisoners of war. We shall land at Dumaguete to-morrow, and if you will -give me your solemn parole not to bear arms against us, I shall send -you with an escort and safe conduct to Palilo. If not, I must send you -to the headquarters of my superior, General Diocno.” - -Phil as spokesman bowed. - -“We shall not give you our parole, colonel,” he said emphatically. “We -prefer to remain prisoners of war.” - -“As you will,” the insurgent answered coldly, but his swarthy face -betrayed his admiration. “I shall assure you of my good offices with -our general. And now, I shall leave you, but I warn you that your lives -will be in danger if you leave this deck, or if you make the slightest -attempt to thwart my plans. I shall have your belongings brought back -here. You see I can take no chances, and I appreciate that you three -Americans are no mean antagonists.” He cast a look of admiration at -O’Neil, who had been listening in silence, his muscular fingers still -clasping the stout crowbar with which he would like to have brained -this pompous little Filipino. - -“Beggars can’t be choosers, Mr. Perry,” O’Neil exclaimed with a wry -smile after the officer had departed, “and I guess it was a good thing -the girl knew how to get the ear of that there little bantam rooster. -In another minute, I’d have brained one of them, and then those words -she spoke would have had as much chance to be heard as the chairman’s -voice in a state convention.” - -The Americans’ belongings were brought to them from their cabin by -several evil-looking natives, and very soon all were comfortable under -the awning, protected from the wind by the boat against which an hour -ago they had been about to make their last stand. - -The sun awakened the Americans at an early hour the next morning. While -they were sipping their morning coffee, the lads gazed in admiration -at the beautiful scenery about them. The little steamer had during -the night wound its way past myriads of small islands, now but black -smudges astern. The high mountains of Kapay Island rose boldly from the -sea on their starboard hand. Ahead, becoming more distinct, was the -shore line toward which the steamer was now traveling at an increased -speed as told by the more rapid chugging of her engines. - -“Hello,” Phil exclaimed as he cast a glance toward the bridge, -“something’s happening.” - -Sydney and O’Neil followed his gaze. There on the bridge were Martinez -and the native pilot, who had apparently been spared in the attack of -the night before. Martinez was walking up and down excitedly, casting -an anxious glance ever and again off on the port quarter. - -It was O’Neil who was the first to discover the reason for the evident -excitement of their captors. - -“Smoke,” he exclaimed laconically, characteristically jerking his thumb -toward the islands astern fast being swallowed up in the glassy sea. -“They ain’t taking no chances. That stretch of shore yonder,” he added, -his gaze on the shore line ahead, “must be the mouth of the Davao -River.” - -The lads gazed eagerly at the faint curl of smoke astern, but it gave -them but scant encouragement, for it was only too evident that before -the stranger, if it were one of the many small gunboats patrolling the -islands, could hope to get within gunshot of the “Negros,” the steamer -would have crossed the shallow bar of the Davao River and be safe from -the pursuit of the deeper vessel. - -“If we could only stop her,” Phil lamented. “Smash those rickety -engines or haul fires in the boiler.” - -O’Neil in answer cast a comprehensive glance at the sentries on guard -on the upper deck. The evil-looking natives were squatted in plain -sight, their loaded rifles held tightly in their brown fingers. - -“Oh! for three good Krag rifles,” Sydney cried petulantly; “we could -clear this deck and then jam the steering gear there, and by the time -they could overpower us the gunboat, if it is one, would make them -heave to.” - -In a short time the girl and her brother joined them, and the native -guards arose and moved farther away. - -“It is one of your gunboats,” she announced smiling mischievously -at the evident pleasure of the midshipmen; “Colonel Martinez has -recognized her through his telescope. She is giving chase, but -Dumaguete is now scarcely twenty-five miles ahead, so I fear there will -not be a rescue.” - -Phil calculated quickly. If Martinez could see the gunboat with his -glass to recognize her she could not be over ten to twelve miles -astern. The “Negros’” best speed was ten knots, which meant two and a -half hours before she could reach the river bar. He knew that several -of the gunboats were good for fifteen knots. If this were one of the -fast ones, which he earnestly prayed it was, in two hours and a half -the gunboat would be up to the “Negros.” His face brightened as these -figures awakened his hopes. - -While the Americans went through the pretense of breakfast the “Negros” -steamed swiftly toward the shore, and they saw with rising hopes the -white hull of a large vessel raise itself slowly out of the deep blue -of the tropical sea. - -Phil eyed the Filipino girl questioningly. He could tell nothing from -her sphynx-like face. Would she be glad to be rescued from this band -of outlaws or was she at home and safe among them? The respect shown -her by the leader and his men seemed to point to the conclusion that -she was of importance among her people. He knew not what were those -crisp words spoken the night before to prevent the fierce onslaught of -the natives, but they had calmed the storm. She had saved their lives, -that much was certain; and for that, even though she was at heart in -sympathy with this band of pirates, he owed her his gratitude. - -His whole heart rebelled against the thought of captivity among the -insurgents. He knew it would be a living death. Poorly nourished and -without the necessities of life; exposed to the savage temper of a -people whose spirits fluctuated more rapidly than a tropical barometer, -there seemed but little to live for. Perhaps death would be happier! -His thoughts dwelt upon the stories he had heard of the atrocities -committed by this same Diocno upon American soldiers who had been -captured. Some of them he had buried alive in an ant-hill all but their -heads, with their mouths propped open and a train of sugar leading -to their swollen tongues. A cold shiver ran down his spine as his -imagination pictured the agony of these men as they slowly died. - -“It’s the ‘Albany,’” O’Neil cried joyfully a minute later, “and do you -see the bone in her teeth? She’s making nearly twenty knots. Why, it’s -all over but the shouting. These little yellow runts will look well -when they are lined up against the wall at Cavite and shot for piracy.” - -Phil held up his hand to demand silence from the excited sailor. He did -not know how much English the girl might know, and the ladrone leader -might learn the dire wish of the sailorman for him and his followers. -Then if the “Negros” escaped, his anger could be vented upon the -Americans. But the girl’s face did not betray that she had understood -the meaning of O’Neil’s words. The “Albany” was fast approaching, but -Phil knew that O’Neil must be overestimating the cruiser’s speed; the -most she could make, without special preparation, would be fifteen -knots, but, and his joy welled up into his eyes,--her six-inch guns! He -had seen them fired with accuracy at four miles. - -The shore line ahead had now become distinct. The deep cut in the -surrounding hills betrayed the presence of the Davao River as it flowed -through them to the sea. Groves of high-topped palm trees appeared, a -deeper green against the emerald background, while the water stretching -toward them from the land polluted the sea with a dull brown stain--the -muddy water of the river. The town of Dumaguete could not be seen, -but from the curls of rising smoke, Phil knew it must be beyond the -first bend of the river and screened from view by the spur-like hill -stretching its length from the mountains behind to the water’s edge. - -The girl sat between the two midshipmen, her small brother innocently -unconscious of the tragedy being enacted about him, playing joyfully -about the decks. Phil watched the child as a relief to his overanxious -mind. He had dislodged a wedge-shaped block of wood from under the -quarter boat, and was using it to frighten a large monkey which was -eying him grotesquely from on top of the tattered awning. The monkey -apparently did not enjoy the game, for he suddenly flew screeching at -the boy, his mouth opened viciously. The boy in his haste to escape -dropped the block of wood almost on Phil’s foot and the midshipman -determinedly placed his foot upon it. In that instant an idea had -occurred to him. His pulse beat faster, as the thought flashed into his -mind. He would use it as a last resort, even though it would bring the -howling mob of natives vengefully about their heads. - -“Now she’s talking,” O’Neil exclaimed grimly, as a flash and a puff -of brownish smoke belched from the bow of the distant cruiser. The -Americans arose to their feet, their eyes held fascinatingly on the -cruiser. They knew that a hundred-pound shell was speeding toward -them at a speed of a mile in three seconds. The Filipino girl sat -unconcernedly sipping her coffee. She was as yet ignorant of the -meaning of that flash from a vessel nearly five miles away. - -Far astern a column of water arose in the air and the distant shock of -the discharge came to their expectant ears. - -Phil saw with sinking heart that the “Negros” had entered the -discolored water from the river. Ahead less than two miles the -ever-present bamboo fish weirs showed the commencement of the shallows -of the Davao River. His hopes died within him. The cruiser was not -making the speed he had hoped. She would hardly be in range before -the “Negros” had put the high spur of land between her and the enemy. -The cruiser, apparently seeing the quarry was about to escape, opened -a rapid fire in hopes of intimidating or crippling its prey; but the -range was too great. The shells hissed close to the stern of the -fleeing vessel; the boasted accuracy of American gunners was lacking. - -“If she was only a thousand yards closer,” O’Neil cried in bitter -disappointment. “It’s only a matter of luck at this distance. Look -out,” he yelled as a shell struck the water with the noise of an -express train, within fifty feet of the fleeing “Negros.” - -The Filipino girl’s face blanched, while the boy ran cowering to his -sister’s side. The danger to them seemed almost supernatural. The -girl’s lips moved, and Phil saw that she was praying. For a moment a -fear seized him. The thought of their danger was certainly unnerving. -A single shell exploding near them would send them all to eternity. -The fish weirs were now abreast the ship and the “Negros’” bow was -being guided into the narrow, tortuous channel of the delta. The -Filipino pilot on the bridge spun his steering wheel from side to side, -following the twisting channel. The quadrant with its rusty chain, -connecting the wheel and the rudder, clanked loudly at Phil’s feet. Now -was the time to put his daring plan in operation. He saw that the four -guards had taken refuge behind the boats, from which they peered out -with frightened eyes at the oncoming cruiser, dodging out of sight at -each screech of a shell. They had apparently forgotten the prisoners -whom they were guarding, for their rifles and belts were resting on -the hatch several yards away. - -“When I give the word, you jump for those rifles and belts,” Phil said -in a low, intense voice, glancing covertly at the terrified girl at his -side. “I am going to jam the steering quadrant. When you get the guns,” -he continued, “take cover behind the boats. It may cost us our lives, -but anything is better than imprisonment among these people.” - -O’Neil and Sydney breathed a gasping assent to the bold plan. Phil -watched carefully the quadrant; he saw it move slowly over until it -was hard astarboard. He reached down, grasping the boy’s block of wood -under his foot, then slid it slowly, amid the terrific noise of a -passing shell, toward the quadrant. He knew the wedge would hold the -rudder over and the “Negros,” unable to steer, would ground on the -edge of the channel, thus leaving her helpless to be captured by the -cruiser. He opened his mouth to give the signal for his companions to -act, when a shrill warning cry sounded in his ears and he was roughly -drawn back into his chair and the wedge dropped from his hands a foot -from its goal. - - - - -CHAPTER III - -A LEAK OF MILITARY INFORMATION - - -Brigadier-General Wilson sat at his desk in the headquarters building -at Palilo. In the spacious corridors outside orderlies hurried to and -fro, carrying messages from the several officers of the staff whose -offices joined that of the general. - -Before him was a chart of his military district, and while he pondered -he juggled a score or more of different colored pins with little tags -attached to them. Those pins with blue heads represented soldiers of -his command in the field against the enemy while the ones with the -green heads were the ladrones or insurrectos, whom he had been fighting -without success for nearly six months. - -“They jump about as if they were mounted in balloons,” he exclaimed -testily as he drew out several green-headed pins and replaced them in -accordance with recent information in other localities on the map. The -big headquarters clock ticked away in silence, while the gray-haired -veteran again lapsed into thought over his problem. - -“Here are two regiments in the field,” he complained querulously; -“Gordon with two companies at San Juan, Baker with a company at -Binalbagan, Anderson and a battalion at Barotoc, Huse and a company -at Estancia, Pollard with two companies at Kapiz, Shanks with three -companies at Carles, Stewart with his rough-riders at Dumangas and Bane -with his two battalions as a flying column. That ought to give us some -results, and yet what have we to show for it?” - -The general raised his thoughtful eyes, as his orderly’s step sounded -on the soft matting at his side. - -“A telegram,” he exclaimed with a show of interest. “Tell Major Marble -I wish to see him,” he added, tearing open the yellow envelope. - -“Whew!” he whistled in sudden consternation as he read the unwelcome -message. “They not only avoided Gordon but attacked San Juan in his -absence, cutting up ten of his men left to guard the town. This thing -has got to be stopped. There is a leak somewhere and I am going to put -my hand on it before I send out another expedition.” - -He pushed the chart back on his desk and rose suddenly to his feet. - -“Major,” he cried as the adjutant-general’s active figure entered the -office, “we are all a set of ninnies. Don’t start and look indignant, -sir,” he added in mock severity. “You are as bad as the rest, but Blynn -there is the worst of us all, for he can’t do what he’s employed to -do--you and I are only plain, blunt soldiers, while he is supposed,” -with fine scorn, “to be in addition lawyer and detective; a regular -secret service sleuth and all that. - -“Here, read that,” he ended throwing the telegram on the desk. “You -see it’s the same old story, and ten more men butchered through our -stupidity.” - -The general paced up and down his office with quick, energetic steps. - -“I’ve a good mind to go out in the field myself,” he exclaimed, half to -himself. “I am tired of these silly, costly blunders.” Then he glanced -through the open door into the next office to his own. “Come here, -Blynn!” he hailed. - -A stout, dark-visaged officer arose from a desk littered with countless -papers and came energetically toward him. - -The older officer’s eyes roamed searchingly over his judge-advocate -general’s strong, massive frame; he gazed with kindling eyes at the -bronzed cheeks, the unbending directness of his black eyes, the firm -set to the bulldog jaws. Here surely was no weakling. He waved his hand -toward the adjutant-general, standing in stunned silence, the telegram -crumpled in his hand. - -“That may interest you,” the general exclaimed as he turned away. - -“The information was first hand, sir,” Captain Blynn’s bass voice -insisted after he had straightened the paper and read the unwelcome -message. “There’s been a leak.” - -“Of course there’s been a leak,” the general announced hotly, “any -idiot would see that, but where? Where? that’s the question!” - -Captain Blynn returned to his desk and drew out a bundle of papers -from a locked drawer. He glanced over them hurriedly. Every word was -familiar to him. Could he have made a mistake? Every witness whom he -had examined had given the same information. These natives had not -been coerced; they had come to him of their own volition. Espinosa had -vouched for each. Then he stopped, the papers fell from his hand to the -desk. No! it could not be possible! Espinosa was surely loyal. That -much was sure. For the space of a minute he was lost in thought. “I -shall test him,” he muttered, while he pressed a bell at his side. - -“Tell Señor Espinosa over the telephone that I shall call on him in an -hour on important business,” he instructed the orderly who answered his -summons. - -An hour later Captain Blynn mounted the high stairs of the wealthy -Filipino’s dwelling. - -“Buenos Dias, El Capitan,” Señor Manuel Espinosa cried delightedly as -he pushed a chair forward for his visitor. But the smile died quickly -on the native’s face as Captain Blynn waved away the chair impatiently, -almost rudely, and in his typical way jumped into the very midst of the -matter in hand. - -“Señor,” he exclaimed angrily, “I’ve been betrayed! Do you understand?” -he cried menacingly, his flashing eyes fixed on the crafty face -opposite him, while he shook his big, strong fist before the eyes of -the startled Presidente of Palilo. “Betrayed, that’s the word, and if -I can lay my hand on the hound, I’ll swing him to the eaves of his own -house-top.” - -Señor Espinosa was silent, his crafty, bead-like eyes regarding closely -the angry, excited face of the judge-advocate. - -“Captain Gordon went on a wild-goose chase, and when he returned he -found the insurgents had been in San Juan in his absence. Ten soldiers, -American men, were caught, trapped, and butchered. The natives who -brought me the information were vouched for by you and now you’ve got -to prove to me that you’re not a sneaking traitor!” - -The captain’s words tumbled one after another so fast that the little -Filipino could grasp only half their meaning, but the last could not -be misunderstood. His brown face turned a sickly yellow, while his -frightened eyes sought instinctively for some weapon of defense from -this terrible American, who was strong enough to tear his frail body -limb from limb. - -“Ah, señor capitan, is this your much-boasted American justice?” he -gasped in a weak voice. “Am I then judged guilty without hearing my -defense?” His voice became stronger as he proceeded. “Let us look over -this calmly,” he begged. “I, myself, have been betrayed. In embracing -the American cause, I have made many enemies among my people. I live -constantly in fear of assassination.” He stopped abruptly, his voice -choking and his eyes filled with tears of self-pity. - -Captain Blynn had dealt with many different classes of men in his -twenty odd years of service. He had been a terror to the ruffians on -the Western frontier where he had been stationed during the several -Indian wars. The “bad men” had said when they had found Blynn against -them, “We might as well own up--we can’t fool Blynn.” - -But here was a case that baffled him. In the hour before going to -this house he had after deep thought believed that after all Espinosa -was a traitor, and he had avowedly intended to force him to confess -his treason; but now in spite of these resolves, the captain was -weakening. After all might not the Filipino be innocent? At all events -he would listen to his defense. - -Captain Blynn dropped his muscular hands, which had been creeping -menacingly toward the thin yellow throat of the Presidente, and sat -down suddenly in the chair which the native had previously offered him. - -“Go on!” he ordered harshly. “I’ll suspend judgment, but remember, if -you can’t prove your innocence, I’ll give you water. Do you understand, -water! I’ve never given it, and I don’t believe in it, but if you can’t -show me how these men were butchered, I’ll fill you up to the neck with -it.” - -Espinosa wetted his lips with his tongue and swallowed hard, but the -captain by taking the proffered chair had removed the native from the -terrifying influence of those powerful twitching fingers which he had -seen ready to throttle him, and he, in proportion to the distance away -of the cause of his fear, grew bolder. - -“The señor capitan must know of my sincerity,” he pleaded in a weak -voice. “Have I not taken the oath of allegiance to the United States? -Do I not know the punishment for breaking that oath?” - -Captain Blynn nodded his head. “Go ahead,” he commanded impatiently; -“cut that out, give me the unvarnished story.” - -“The information which I gave you and which was sworn to by three -witnesses came from Juan Rodriguez,” Espinosa continued, dropping his -voice to a whisper and approaching closer to the American. Then he -stopped and glanced covertly at his listener’s startled face. - -“Juan Rodriguez!” the judge-advocate general exclaimed half rising in -his excitement. “Then you believe that he has deliberately furnished -false information of the insurgents’ movements?” - -While the two were talking a servant brought refreshments, which the -army man waved impatiently aside. Espinosa helped himself and as he did -so he followed his servant’s eye to a tightly rolled piece of paper -inside the salva. He drew it out hastily, unrolling it in silence, -feeling rather than seeing the captain’s eyes upon him, then he read -the few lines written therein. Here was a chance to redeem his good -name or at least save himself for this time from the fierce American. -He asked a question in the native language and received a monosyllabic -answer. - -“This is very important,” he exclaimed suddenly turning to the American -officer. His voice was now joyful, full of confidence. “Two hundred -riflemen have landed at Dumaguete from Luzon. To-night they will be -encamped on a hill near Banate. You can attack them there before they -can join Diocno.” - -Captain Blynn jumped to his feet, reaching out for the paper; he took -it, scrutinizing it closely--then stuck it quietly into his pocket. -Espinosa held out a trembling hand, bent upon regaining the note, but -Captain Blynn had turned away, picking up his hat and whip from the -table behind him. - -“I shall myself go in command of this expedition,” he announced gruffly -as he moved toward the stairs, “and I shall expect you to accompany me, -señor. We shall start at sunset.” - -Señor Espinosa feebly murmured his willingness, and after waiting -to see the burly figure of his visitor pass out through the wide -entrance, he turned and called for his servant. - -“Tell the messenger I will speak to him,” he said as the muchacho -noiselessly entered. - -A moment later a ragged native stood tremblingly before him, twisting -his dirty head-covering in his nervous hands. - -Espinosa seated himself luxuriously in the chair recently vacated -by Captain Blynn. He had now regained his old confidence and cruel -arrogance, while he fired question after question at the uncomfortable -native. - -The Presidente sat motionless in his chair long after his messenger -had gone. His servant came noiselessly into the room several times -but tiptoed away, believing his master was asleep. But Espinosa was -far from sleep, his brain was actively at work. How could he hold his -position and yet remain undiscovered to this terrible Captain Blynn? He -shuddered as he remembered those big hands as they worked longingly to -grasp his slender neck. He was not a fighting man; the inheritance of -his father’s Chinese blood mixed with the cruelty in the native strain -qualified him only for plotting. Others could do the fighting. His -brain and cunning would furnish them the means and opportunity. But -Rodriguez--he was too honest, and knew too much; he stood a menacing -figure in his path as the leader of his people. He had, however, set -the train of powder on fire, and now he would watch it burn. Once -Rodriguez was removed there were no others strong enough to thwart -him. Even Diocno bowed to his superior sagacity. Then he could cast -off this halter that he felt tightening about his neck. With Diocno -and Rodriguez out of the way, he could make terms with these childlike -Americans, and then with his fortune made shake the dust of the islands -forever from his feet. - -An hour before sunset he arose and dressed himself for his ride, -ordering his servant to have his horse ready. The messenger had three -hours’ start; that would insure the escape of the Tagalos. Captain -Blynn would find that his information was true. He could not blame him -if the enemy had taken alarm and fled. As for the other matter, if the -Americans would only arrest Rodriguez he would see that he did not -interfere with his cherished plans for power. As he buckled on his -English made leggings, he whistled gaily an old Spanish air, one he -had heard in Spain; in his mind he saw the brightly lighted theatre, -the richly dressed people in the boxes. Some day he would be rich and -he would then be able to recline in a gilded box and cast disdainful -glances at an admiring crowd. - -His joy would have been indeed short-lived and his castles in Spain -would have fallen as flat as the surface of the sea on a calm day if -he could have known that at that moment his messenger was lying dead -in the trail but half-way to his destination, suddenly overcome by the -terrible scourge of the camp, cholera. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -LANDED IN CAPTIVITY - - -Phil was too angry and humiliated to do more than glare at the girl who -had so cleverly thwarted him in his daring plan to strand the steamer. -His companions had started to spring toward the coveted rifles of their -enemy, but now they sank back into their seats and hopelessly looked -into the menacing muzzles of these same rifles in the hands of the four -aroused sentries. The girl had risen to her feet, her face flushed with -excitement; she raised her hand to the natives, motioning them to put -up their weapons. - -Phil scrambled to his feet and sheepishly dropped again into his chair. -His breathing was quick and his eyes dilated with suppressed rage and -mortification. At that moment he could have quite forgotten his natural -instinct of gallantry and would have taken pleasure in throttling this -slight girl who had come between them and freedom. - -“They would have all been shot,” she said in quick accents of -excitement. “You see I can understand a little English. I could not be -a traitor to my own blood as long as I had power to prevent it.” - -For answer Phil gave her a look of loathing. - -The girl recoiled under his menacing glance. - -“I am sorry for you,” she hastened to add, “for now Colonel Martinez -will have to keep you closer prisoners, unless you give me your word -that you will not again try to prevent the escape of the steamer.” - -Phil shook his head savagely, his eyes on the steering quadrant within -easy reach of his hand. The girl waited breathlessly for an answer, -then finding none was forthcoming she gave a sharp command in her -own language and immediately the four sentries closed in around the -Americans, their rifles pointed toward their prisoners. - -“For goodness’ sake, Phil,” Sydney exclaimed in an agony of doubt, -“don’t be foolhardy. We are absolutely in their power. See,” he cried -desperately, “the ‘Albany’ has stopped and sheered away. She has given -up the chase.” - -Phil realized that Sydney was right--nothing could be gained by giving -in to his rash anger. He saw that O’Neil had dropped the crowbar and -had been led away by two of the natives, going as peacefully as a lamb. -However his pride stood in the way of an outward surrender, and instead -of agreeing to make no attempts to disable the steamer he arose and -moved away from the tempting steering quadrant. - -The “Negros” had meanwhile threaded her way among the dangerous shoals -and was now in the river; the cruiser had disappeared behind the land. - -A great crowd of natives ashore had witnessed the escape of the steamer -from the war-ship and these lined the banks of the river shouting -joyfully as the “Negros” steamed quietly to the bamboo pier in front of -the village. - -As soon as the dock had been reached, the girl dismissed the guards and -the Americans once more gathered about the breakfast table. - -A few moments later Colonel Martinez, his face wreathed in smiles, left -the bridge and joined them. - -“You are to be given the freedom of the town,” he said as he took a -cup of coffee from the servant’s hands and sipped it gratefully, “but -I warn you if you attempt to escape you will be shot, and even if you -escaped, without guides you would be lost in the jungle and be killed -by ladrones.” - -Phil bowed his head in sign of submission. They were certainly -prisoners, without hope of rescue. - -“To-morrow morning,” Colonel Martinez added, “we shall leave the -village and march inland. I have already sent to notify our leader that -I have successfully arrived. I think for your own good it would be -wiser for you to remain on board here until we start. I do not trust -the temper of the people. Americans are not just now in favor.” He -finished with an amused smile on his face. - -After their captors had left them, the three terribly disappointed men -sat bemoaning their fate. - -“We might just as well make the best of it,” Sydney philosophically -assured the others. “There certainly isn’t any way to escape that I -can see. After all, we’ve been in just as tight places and have come -out of them; we don’t make matters any better by crying over spilled -milk.” - -“If that girl hadn’t betrayed us,” Phil moaned, “we would have been on -board the ‘Albany’ this minute.” - -“Mr. Perry,” O’Neil broke in apologetically, “it ain’t like you -to be unfair to anybody, most of all a woman. These are her own -people--Colonel Martinez must be a friend of hers, or otherwise we -wouldn’t have been living to see the ‘Albany.’ If she had only been an -ordinary native girl, these ladrones wouldn’t have stopped and bowed -and scraped and then given us the freedom of the after deck of the -ship. No, sir, she’s a person of consequence. She saved our lives and -then afterward she saved the lives of Colonel Martinez and his band -of cutthroats, for if they had fallen into the hands of the crew of -the ‘Albany’ they would have all been shot or swung at her yard-arm. -Seizing this merchant ship and killing her captain is piracy.” - -“I think O’Neil is right,” Sydney exclaimed patting the sailor on the -back enthusiastically. “The girl’s all right--I’ll take my hat off to -her every time.” - -“It was my own stupidity, I suppose,” Phil declared, his face sobering -slightly. “I thought she was too frightened to know what was happening; -in fact I really didn’t believe she would understand what I intended -doing.” - -“Who do you suppose she is?” Sydney asked eagerly. “Isn’t it queer she -has never told us her name?” - -“It probably wouldn’t aid us if she had,” Phil replied; “she’s probably -the daughter of some rich Filipino, who holds a fat position under our -civil government. By the way she talked when we first met her I thought -she was dead against war, yet she appears to know and welcome these -cutthroat Tagalos with open arms.” - -“There you go, Phil,” Sydney admonished, “unfair again. She has so far -shown herself willing to help both sides. In your heart, when you’ve -recovered from your disappointment and humiliation at being handled so -roughly by a girl, you’ll see that she acted in a way that was just to -both the insurgents and ourselves.” - -The next morning at daylight the Americans were up and dressed, ready -for the march with their captors. - -“Colonel Martinez has secured enough horses for you and your companions -to ride,” the girl told them as a half dozen small Filipino ponies were -led down to the end of the wharf. “Your belongings will be carried -by natives whom he has secured, so I hope you will not be put to too -great hardships. The soldiers are used to marching, but for those -unaccustomed to the country it is very tedious.” - -Phil thanked her not ungraciously. He had during many hours of a -sleepless night brooded over the situation and had awakened with much -kindlier thoughts for this girl than he had held the night before. - -The Americans, with Colonel Martinez, the girl and her brother -rode at the head of the long file of armed insurgent soldiers. As -the procession passed through the streets of the town the natives -gathered and gave excited and enthusiastic yells of pleasure. Great -curiosity was shown as to the white captives, but Colonel Martinez took -precautions that they should not be disturbed by the evident dislike -of the people. Phil read hatred in many eyes as they wended their -way through the curious crowds, and he quite believed the insurgent -colonel’s words that they would not be safe among them. - -The trail which they were following led steadily inland, and constantly -climbed above the level of the sea. After a few miles had been covered -all signs of habitation disappeared, the country was bleak and barren -of cultivation. At first they had passed through groves of cocoanut, -banana and many varieties of tropical fruit trees and afterward the -velvety green of rice fields lay on either hand, but now the earth -was scorched and brown, the high jungle bush lay thick on either side -of the trail. The Americans realized the hardships of a campaign in -such a country against a wild and determined foe. They had marched for -about four hours without a rest when a signal of warning was given from -scouts in front. The leader stopped, giving a low order to a soldier at -his elbow. - -“What is it?” Phil breathed, forcing his pony forward eagerly. - -“They’ve seen something,” O’Neil whispered; “probably a company of our -soldiers on a ‘hike.’” - -The Americans were ordered to dismount, and a dozen riflemen quietly -surrounded them. Colonel Martinez spurred ahead while the entire band -dissolved in the jungle, leaving the trail clear. Scarcely twenty feet -from the trail the Americans were roughly seized, their hands secured -tightly behind their backs and gags were forced into their mouths. They -submitted peaceably. Suddenly, scarcely fifty yards away, a column -of khaki-clad soldiers appeared marching down the trail. Phil caught -a glimpse through a vista in the dense brush of these men, swinging -lightly along, ignorant of the presence, so near them, of over two -hundred armed enemies. His pulse beat fast and his heart seemed ready -to burst within him. Were these Americans walking innocently into an -ambush? He tried to scream a warning, but he emitted no sound save a -faint gurgle, which his guards heard, and for his pains struck him -down with their knees until he lay with his face pressed close to the -prickly earth. He could hear the tramp of shod feet and an occasional -snatch of a song. Once he heard a sharp command in English and at -another time a jest which called forth local laughter. It seemed an -age since he had seen the head of this column appear, and yet the -earth trembled under the tread of a multitude of feet. Finally the -sounds died away. The soldiers had passed, and no attack had been made. -After a long hour of waiting their guards brought out the Americans -and unbound their hands, taking out the cruel gags from their mouths. -Colonel Martinez appeared, still mounted upon his small gray pony. - -“I am very sorry,” he said politely, “but I could not run the -risk of detection. That was Colonel Bane with two battalions of -the Seventy-eighth Infantry. I had been warned that he was in the -neighborhood. I was not strong enough to attack him.” - -Phil could have cried aloud at the utter uselessness of this warfare. -Their movements heralded far and wide whenever a column moved, in a -country well-nigh impenetrable, how were the Americans ever to put down -this ugly rebellion? - -At sunset the band halted and went into camp. Phil saw that the site -selected was a strong one and one that could be easily defended from -attack if the attackers came by trail, and there seemed no other way -through the impenetrable brush. - -“We shall remain here until my messenger returns,” Phil overheard -Colonel Martinez say to the girl. “Will you wait until your father -sends for you, or will you accept an escort from me?” - -“I shall remain here,” she said; “the morning should bring my own -people.” - -Shortly afterward the girl took her brother’s hand and led him away -to the part of the camp that had been set aside for her own use, and -Colonel Martinez joined the disconsolate Americans. - -“The señorita,” he said as he sat down on the ground near Phil, “has -told me of the brave conduct of my prisoners, and I wish it were in -my power to set you free. I have known many American navy men before -this war began and my treatment by them has always been courteous and -considerate. I have the power to take your parole, and knowing the -hardships which you must undergo as prisoners among our soldiers I -advise you to give it. To-morrow morning you can be on your way to -Palilo.” - -It was certainly a grave temptation, but the midshipmen knew that in -giving their parole all hopes of taking part in the war would vanish; -and then, the insurgents not being recognized as belligerents, the Navy -Department might even see fit to order them to break their parole. - -“Thank you, señor,” Phil finally replied. “We shall take our chances -as your prisoners. We shall always remember your considerate treatment -of us, and if by the chances of war the situation is reversed you can -count on us to repay our obligations to a chivalrous enemy.” - -“If you and your companions were to remain in my keeping,” the Filipino -answered, a pleased smile on his face at Phil’s subtle compliment, “I -should have no concern, but I must give you over to the mercies of -General Diocno; he is a Tagalo, and has known nothing but war since -his youth; he would never surrender to the Spaniards, and for years a -price has been upon his head; he is said to be cruel to those who fall -into his hands.” - -Phil shuddered at the frank words of his captor. He saw in the -earnestness of his face that this gruesome information was being given -for the Americans’ own good. - -“Your friends,” the colonel continued, “will doubtless attempt a -rescue, and that will only add to your danger.” - -After Colonel Martinez had said good-night Phil told his companions of -the unpleasant and disquieting reports concerning their future captor, -but nothing could shake O’Neil’s good spirits. - -“It’s all in the game, Mr. Perry,” he said philosophically. “They can’t -do more than kill us, and as we’ve got to die some day, it might just -as well be in Kapay as any other place. But as long as we’ve got our -senses and our strong arms, there are going to be some little brown men -hurt before I give up my mess number. - -“What I’ve been trying to study out,” the sailor continued, seeing the -two lads still silent, “is how all those American soldiers could pass -along that trail and not find out that this band of natives had just -left it. Where are all the old Indian fighters we used to have in the -army?” - -Phil and Sydney both raised their heads, a look of surprise in their -faces. - -“I hadn’t thought of that,” Sydney exclaimed. “Our trail must have been -there; the native soldiers all go barefooted and leave but indistinct -tracks on this hard soil, but our pony tracks must have been in plain -sight.” - -“The solution is,” Phil broke in sadly, “those men were volunteers, the -Seventy-eighth Infantry, the colonel said; there probably wasn’t an old -soldier among them. They fight like demons when they see the enemy, but -are as helpless as children against a savage foe skilled in woodcraft. -If that had been a battalion of regulars there’d have been a fight and -we would now be free, or,” he added with an unconscious shiver, “dead -there in the jungle, for the native guarding me would have been only -too happy to stick his bolo into me.” - -O’Neil had already rolled himself in his blanket, apparently resigned -to the tricks of fate, and the midshipmen, realizing, after their long -day’s ride in spite of their troubled minds, that they were in need -of rest, were soon comfortably settled on the bundles of dry grass -given them to lie upon. As Phil dropped into a troubled sleep, he was -conscious of the four native guards, pacing to and fro just outside of -ear-shot. These four men were all that stood between them and liberty; -for once they had escaped, he felt confident that O’Neil could be -depended upon to follow the track of those half a thousand soldiers who -had marched past so carelessly only a few hours before. - -After what seemed an incredibly short time, although he had slept for -hours, he awakened with a start; sitting bolt upright, he gazed quickly -about him. A faint streak of light in the eastern sky told him the -night had nearly passed. His brain, keenly alive, grasped for a reason; -what had stirred him to wakefulness? All was quiet about the camp. The -guards were no longer on their feet, but he could see their shadowy -forms squatting on the ground, their rifles in their hands. With a -disappointed sigh, for what he did not know, he dropped back upon his -bundle of straw, but he soon found he was too wide awake for more -sleep. He finally arose, stretching himself as though just awakened, -and by an impulse which he was powerless to disobey, walked slowly -toward the guards. As he advanced he saw with surprise that they did -not move. Stealthily he went on until he stood over the nearest one, -squatting naturally, the butt of his rifle between his bare feet. The -guard was sound asleep. Farther on he saw in the dim mysterious light -of early dawn that the other three were also silently sleeping, their -bodies propped up against the trunks of the dwarf pine-trees. Phil’s -heart beat fast. Here was freedom within his grasp. He leaned forward, -seizing the rifle barrel of an unconscious guard, drawing it slowly -from his relaxed fingers. The butt still rested between his feet and as -he slowly, steadily drew the rifle toward him, the sleeping native’s -body settled itself inch by inch upon the ground. - -[Illustration: _HERE WAS FREEDOM WITHIN HIS GRASP_] - -A twig snapped close by, sending the blood coursing through his veins -while his hand shook from the sudden start. Terrified he cast his -startled eyes into the jungle behind him. The dim shadow of a man -stood scarcely a hundred yards away, silently watching him. In the -dim light the figure seemed of heroic size. He retreated toward it and -back to his sleeping companions, the rifle clasped in his hand. Then -suddenly the silence was broken by a volley of rifle-shots and the hiss -of bullets sounded everywhere about him. Stunned, unable to explain -the meaning of this, he dropped to the ground and lay silent, his face -in the straw of his bed. The next second a line of shouting, excited -khaki-clad men streamed past, firing their rifles as they charged upon -their hidden native foes. - - - - -CHAPTER V - -CAPTAIN BLYNN MARCHES - - -As night fell, Captain Blynn led his battalion of regulars from -their barracks, across the bridge and on to the trail leading to -the northward of Palilo. The American officer rode in the lead, the -Filipino Presidente at his side. The soldiers behind him, eight full -companies, each under its own officer, swung along with the long, -untiring step of the American soldier. They each knew that before the -night was over and the sun had lifted its fiery head above the misty -mountains to the eastward twenty miles of rough trail must be covered, -and then they had been promised to be brought face to face with an -enemy whose shadows they had chased during these many long, tiresome -months. - -Espinosa, as he rode in silence by the side of the big American, -chuckled inwardly at the fruitlessness of this expedition. “These -childlike American dogs,” he thought, “they will arrive in time to see -the smouldering fires where our men have cooked their morning rice, -while they will be high in the hills, looking down on them derisively, -and possibly will fire a few shots at long range to show their -contempt.” - -Captain Blynn’s restless gaze contemplated his companion from time to -time as the native signaled the right trail. They were now in a narrow -defile between two hills that rose precipitously to a height of over a -thousand feet. Captain Blynn, as he contemplated his surroundings with -a soldier’s eyes, drew his revolver from its holster and laid it gently -across the pommel of his saddle. - -“A nice place for an ambush,” he said in a low, insinuating voice. “I -suppose, señor, you are prepared to stand before your Maker.” - -The native shuddered. He saw only too clearly the accusation and threat -in this terrible American’s words. If there was to be an ambush, he -knew nothing of it, but if a single hostile shot was fired, he would -pay the penalty with his life. - -The Filipino forced an uneasy laugh. “As far as I know, señor capitan, -there are no insurgents this side of Banate.” - -“For your sake, I hope you are right,” the American replied. “As you -see, I am taking no chances. You are our guide; if you get us into -trouble, you pay, that’s all.” - -Captain Blynn ordered a halt and called a lieutenant from the leading -company. - -“Take ten men, Simpson,” he said, “and act as the point. If you are -attacked, retreat and fall back on the main body.” - -Lieutenant Simpson picked his men quickly and disappeared quietly -down the trail. Captain Blynn watched them until swallowed up in the -darkness, and then set the long line in motion again. Every soldier -took, instinctively, a tighter grip upon his musket, and loosened the -sharp sword bayonet from its scabbard. Each knew that when “Black Jack” -Blynn took precautions there was reason to scent trouble. - -Half-way through the defile a guarded whistle of warning came to -Blynn’s ears from the point. As one man the long column halted; the -soldiers’ heavy breathing was distinctly audible above the tremor -of the metallic rattling of accoutrements. Each soldier sought his -neighbor’s face for a key to the solution of the problem. Blynn, -motioning Espinosa to follow, rode silently forward. In the trail a -hundred paces ahead he saw Lieutenant Simpson bending over a dark -object. - -“What is it?” Blynn asked in a harsh whisper. - -“A dead native,” Simpson answered shortly. Espinosa was off his horse -instantly; bending down quickly he struck a match, illuminating the -native’s dead face. He started, turning a sickly yellow. His heart -stopped beating, and his knees shook under him, but Captain Blynn -was too much occupied with the silent figure to notice the peculiar -behavior of his guide. They turned the dead man over, revealing the -terrible havoc accomplished in but a few hours by the tropical scourge. - -“Poor chap!” Blynn exclaimed. “Only a common ‘Tao’ stricken by cholera -and dead before he knew what had hit him.” - -They moved the body off the trail, and again the command was set in -motion. - -In the flash of the match Espinosa had recognized his messenger -although his face was horribly disfigured by his last mortal suffering. -He shuddered at the consequences of this man’s death--Martinez would -not get his warning message and would fall into the trap set for him. -He, Espinosa, could never explain his actions. He would doubtless pay -for this treachery with his life. But his cruel mind was instantly made -up as to his future actions. He feared this American too thoroughly -not to take them to the place where the Tagalos under Martinez were -encamped; above all else Captain Blynn must be made to believe that he -was sincere; all depended upon that. Everything must be sacrificed for -his final great ambition. Martinez would not be taken alive. That was -a necessity, he would see to that. Once he was killed his part in the -night’s expedition must remain a secret among the Americans. - -Casting from him his first fears he straightened his slight frame and -rode boldly, with head erect, beside the American leader. - -One hour before sunrise Captain Blynn disposed his command in a single -circular line about the base of a high hill; its sides were covered -with a dense jungle while a single trail led to the top. - -Under the guardianship of Espinosa the command moved forward, straight -up through the high clutching brush; the men were so close to each -other that their neighbors on each side were always in sight. Captain -Blynn and one company marched fearlessly up the trail. A few feet from -where the round top hill had been cleared he halted and waited for the -remainder of his men to join him. His enemy’s camp was silent, but -his keen eyes could discern shadowy forms lying prone on the ground. -He searched for a sentry, but no movement could be seen. Were they -all asleep, believing themselves secure in their surroundings? No! -there directly in front of him he saw a white figure standing upright -beside a dark form on the ground. This must be an officer, for the -native soldiers do not wear white--something familiar in the pose and -cut of the uniform struck him. Could it be possible, was it a navy -uniform? At that instant the soldiers on both sides reached the edge -of the clearing. As yet the enemy were unaware of their presence. Not -a moment must be lost; they must attack at once. Firing his revolver, -Captain Blynn plunged forward, straight toward the white-clad figure. -Several of his men passed him while he stopped to find why the figure -had thrown itself face downward in the grass at the discharge of his -revolver. - -The next moment he was shaking hands with three almost tearfully joyful -fellow countrymen. - -As soon as Phil realized that they were again free his thoughts were -for the Filipino girl and her little brother. Was she in danger? -With the rifle he had taken from the sentry in his hands, he rushed -anxiously in the direction that he believed she might be found. He -recognized some of her belongings on the ground at his feet, but the -girl had vanished. Fearful at the thought of finding them killed by his -own people, he sought her everywhere, repeatedly risking his life as -the terrified natives, finding themselves trapped, flung at him with -their long, sharp knives or discharged their weapons almost in his -face. He gave them but little heed, not giving a thought to the reason -why he had not been killed, although a faithful sailor at his elbow was -the only tangible cause. A score of times O’Neil had saved his young -officer at the risk of his own life. - -A small group of struggling men on the right near the edge of the -jungle suddenly caught his restless eye and desperately he plunged -downward toward them. On the ground two men struggled in a death -embrace, while the girl and her brother stood wild-eyed with fright, -unwilling spectators to the fierce duel. Phil gave a gasp of relief -as he stood beside the girl. The two combatants uttered no sound save -their sharp gasps for breath while they struggled for supremacy. Phil -saw with wonder that the men were both natives and then for the first -time realized that they were alone; no soldier was within a hundred -yards of them. Behind them the soldiers were relentlessly, stubbornly -herding the natives into a mass of flashing, frenzied humanity at the -top of the hill. - -“It is Colonel Martinez,” the girl gasped seizing Phil’s arm. “Oh, save -him, señor, he will be murdered.” Phil saw the other native, by an -effort almost superhuman, free his right arm, and in it a bright blade -flashed in the dim light. The girl’s appealing face looked into his for -an instant, and the next moment the lad had thrown himself between the -two men; seizing the hand with the knife he bent it slowly backward, -finally wrenching it from its firm grasp. O’Neil was beside him. The -sailor caught the two natives as if they had been fighting dogs and -held them for a second in his powerful arms clear of the ground. -Espinosa fell limply as the sailor released his hold, and lay breathing -heavily, too exhausted for speech. Colonel Martinez quickly regained -his revolver, and was immediately the man of action. He gazed boldly -at the Americans, his revolver held menacingly, and the while edging -slowly away from his captors. Phil turned his eyes to the figure on -the ground and the angry glare he received disconcerted him; the next -second as he looked about him he saw that Colonel Martinez had gone; -from the gloom of the jungle he heard the rustle of brush and caught a -glimpse of misty forms. He raised his rifle half-way and then lowered -it. In his heart he rejoiced that he had not taken him prisoner. - -In the next second Espinosa leaped toward him. Phil was stunned by a -stinging blow; but before it could be repeated O’Neil interposed and -Espinosa had measured his length on the ground. - -“Where did Colonel Martinez go?” Phil asked quietly. - -“I didn’t see,” O’Neil answered, his face as solemn as that of a judge. - -Phil smiled and put out his hand. The two men exchanged clasps. “I -believe he would have done as much for us,” Phil said. - -Before the sun had risen above the sea to the eastward, the fight was -over. But few of the enemy had escaped. Asking no quarter, fighting to -the last man, they had died as they had lived. Two hundred rifles were -the spoils of the fight. - -Captain Blynn and the midshipmen were seated after their victory on the -bloody battle-field, while the lads gave a hurried account of their -capture. - -Suddenly from the grass a horribly disfigured face confronted them. -It was Espinosa. His cunning gave him counsel that he must control his -ungovernable temper. He could gain nothing by accusing these Americans -of wilfully aiding Martinez in his escape. “I am sorry to inform you, -señor captain, that Colonel Martinez escaped. These gentlemen can tell -you the details. I was about to kill him. They doubtless had good -reasons for permitting him to escape.” - -Captain Blynn turned quickly to the midshipmen, a surprised look on his -face at the words of his guide. - -“Is this true?” he asked angrily. - -Phil felt as he had before the court-martial that had tried him for -disobeying orders. - -“I alone am to blame, captain,” the lad replied quietly, after an -effort. “I saw these two men on the ground and separated them, seeing -they were both natives. This man attacked me afterward, so of course he -was knocked down.” - -“But it was Colonel Martinez! His capture is worth far more than all -these men and rifles,” the captain exclaimed angrily, pointing to the -heaps of slain being laid side by side in the narrow trench dug by the -soldiers. - -“He escaped,” Phil said, his throat dry, but his eyes looking -fearlessly into those of the enraged officer. - -“You will have to explain this, sir,” Captain Blynn cried hoarsely, -cutting short any explanation. “You are under my command here. If you -have deliberately allowed this man to escape, I shall prosecute you to -the utmost of my power, and you know the articles of war sufficiently -to understand the penalty for such an unauthorized act.” - -Phil was stunned; but his conscience had acquitted him of all guilt. - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -THE “MINDINAO” - - -Captain Blynn rested his tired soldiers until the cool of the evening -and then the march was begun back to Palilo, carrying with them the -spoils of the fight. - -The judge-advocate general, in spite of the complete victory, was -not friendly to the Americans whom he had rescued from a torturing -captivity. The escape of the Filipino leader, Colonel Martinez, was -indeed a severe blow to his pride. Both Sydney and O’Neil, while giving -the officer their gratitude for their deliverance, were hurt at his -stern attitude toward Phil. - -“Why did you allow him to escape?” Sydney asked as they were riding -side by side along the back trail which the soldiers had taken the -night before. - -Phil looked at his friend, a hurt expression in his eyes. - -“He was armed,” Phil said quietly, a catch in his voice which he -could not control, “and I knew he would not be taken alive. I couldn’t -kill him,” he added, “before the girl’s eyes, and there seemed no -other way. Something tells me that there is a strong blood tie between -those two. I can’t explain, Syd,” he cried in confusion. “It may sound -sentimental, but the look in the girl’s eyes when she realized what -might happen made me lower the muzzle of the rifle to the ground.” - -Sydney was silent. He believed implicitly in Phil and if opportunity -had offered he was sure that he would have acted the same. - -“But why didn’t you give Captain Blynn your reasons for allowing this -insurgent to escape? You must see how he now views the occurrence and a -word from you would have set matters straight.” - -A sudden anger came into Phil’s face. “I would have told him all, but -you saw how he cut off my explanation and arraigned me before that -despicable spy Espinosa. After that a mule team couldn’t drag the story -from me. I’ll tell it in good time, but not to Captain Blynn. Syd,” -he added confidingly, “I don’t like that fellow Espinosa’s looks. He -reminds me of a domesticated coyote. He will bite the hands that feed -him some day. You see if he doesn’t!” - -“I haven’t any use for these men who are traitors to their own -countrymen,” O’Neil joined in as he rode up alongside of Phil, the -trail having widened to allow three abreast. “The soldiers tell me he -is the white-haired old boy with Captain Blynn. It was he that betrayed -the Tagalos. How he gets his information no one seems to know. Did -you notice,” he asked suddenly, “the expression on his face when I -dragged him away from the insurgent colonel? He wanted that man’s life -the worst kind, and the girl’s too, I guess. We’ve made an enemy, Mr. -Perry,” the sailor added decidedly, “and one who won’t soon forget us.” - -Phil gave a mirthless laugh. - -“I don’t mind making that sort of an enemy,” he said, “but we shall -have to keep our eyes open hereafter, I suppose, for Señor Espinosa.” - -It was broad daylight before the expedition arrived in Palilo and after -a formal parting from the other Americans, which O’Neil described -as “the frozen mit,” the naval men separated from the soldiers and -took the street leading to the water-front. There in front of the -quartermaster’s depot they saw the gunboat “Mindinao” moored snugly to -the stone jetty. - -A wave of pride swept through Phil’s body as he took in the trim -outlines of his command, one of which any lad would be proud to be -captain. - -A score of curious faces peered at them from the gunboat as they drew -rein at the gangway and dismounted. - -An exclamation of surprised inquiry met their ears from the -quarter-deck of the vessel and a second later Ensign Marshall was -wringing their hands warmly. - -“Well, if this isn’t luck,” he cried. “I am partly packed and there’s a -steamer for Manila this afternoon. But,” and he stopped, precipitously -gazing with frank astonishment at their soiled and mud-stained -uniforms, “where did you come from? I expected you by boat.” - -While the Chinese servants set before their hungry eyes a tempting -breakfast, Phil and Sydney in turn gave Marshall the exciting incidents -of their journey from Manila. O’Neil meanwhile had turned forward and -was at once the centre of an admiring crowd of sailors; his big voice -and hearty laugh sounded distinctly over the quiet water-front. - -“If you aren’t the luckiest lambs I’ve ever seen,” Marshall laughed -admiringly; “you’re a regular lodestone, the three of you. Everything -you touch turns to excitement. Now I’ve been here for three months, -most of the time cooling my heels at the dock with no one to talk to -except a lot of hayseed volunteers who haven’t even been to sea, and -now you come along and relieve me and I suppose, ‘presto,’ there’ll be -something doing at once.” - -“I hope not until we can get a little sleep,” Phil exclaimed, smiling -at Marshall’s sincerity. “I am sleepy enough to drop off standing up.” - -“Well,” Marshall said as he pushed back his chair and arose from the -table, “I’ll be finished packing in an hour, and then you can read your -orders and take command. I don’t want to miss that boat, for she makes -easy connections with the transport for home. Think of it, Perry, home! -Doesn’t it sound fine?” Then, seeing that the name had not stirred -his listeners to a great degree of enthusiasm, he exclaimed, “Well, -if you’d been living by yourself for nearly a year and hadn’t seen -anything but these natives, home would sound good to you, too.” - -The lads were soon asleep in steamer chairs under the quarter-deck -awning, while Marshall busied himself with his packing. The Chinese -servants moved about noiselessly and with deft hands quickly filled the -two open trunks. Finally Marshall remade his toilet and appeared spick -and span in a fresh and spotless white uniform. - -Refreshed by even this short nap the midshipmen opened their trunks, -which had been carried over nearly sixty miles of rough country on the -shoulders of stalwart native carriers, and in an incredibly short time -appeared on deck as fresh in appearance as if they had both stepped -from the proverbial band-box. - -A shrill whistle sounded on the gunboat followed by the call, “Lay aft, -everybody.” - -The men filed aft on the miniature quarter-deck, lining themselves -obediently on each side, and there waited. - -A smile stole irrepressibly to Phil’s face. Here on board this tiny -ship, scarcely a hundred feet long and of a little over one hundred -tons displacement, the far-reaching navy regulations were being carried -out with as much form and punctiliousness as they would be on the -biggest battle-ship. - -In a graceful speech Marshall bade farewell to his small crew and then -he unfolded the paper in his hand signed by no less a personage than -the admiral commanding the Asiatic fleet. - -“You are, upon the reporting of your relief, Midshipman Philip Perry, -U. S. Navy, detached from the command of the U. S. S. ‘Mindinao’ and -will proceed immediately to Manila, reporting your arrival, for passage -to your home, to the senior officer present.” - -As soon as Marshall’s voice died away, Phil began to read his -own orders, which he had kept safely pinned to the inside of his -breast-pocket during the last few exciting days. - -“You are hereby detached from the U. S. S. ‘Phœnix’ and will proceed -to Palilo, Island of Kapay, Philippine Islands, and upon your arrival -assume command of the U. S. S. ‘Mindinao’ as the relief of Ensign -Charles Marshall, U. S. Navy.” - -For a moment there was complete silence, broken in an instant by a -hoarse voice. - -“Three cheers for Captain Marshall.” - -From twenty-five strong chests the cheers were given, while the happy -man honored blushed with pleasurable pride and manly tears welled to -his eyes. And then Phil’s turn came to blush and look confused, and as -he said afterward, foolish, when the same loud voice proposed, “Three -cheers for Captain Perry.” - -Immediately the cheering was over the boatswain’s mate’s pipe sounded -shrilly and the men, touching their caps respectfully, returned to -their quarters forward. - -The lads saw Marshall sail away on a small island steamer similar to -the one on which they had commenced their journey four days before and -then returned to sit upon the quarter-deck of their gunboat and enjoy -the intense gratification of being their own masters on their own ship. - -“Think of it, Syd. If I want to get under way all I have to do is to -tell the machinist to get up steam and off we go. It’s like having -your own yacht,” Phil exclaimed contentedly, leaning back luxuriantly -in his chair and cocking his feet up comfortably on the rail. “Let me -see,” he added banteringly, “I am the captain; you are the executive -officer, navigator, ordnance officer, all the watch officers and the -chief engineer. Don’t you feel heavy with all those titles?” - -Sydney smiled happily. “Well, if the ‘old man’ doesn’t expect too much -of a poor midshipman, I’ll do my best to uphold the dignity of them -all,” he replied. - -After they had settled themselves in their new homes and had inspected -every foot of the clean, trim little craft, admired the powerful -battery of six long three-pounder guns, with auxiliaries of two -one-pounders and a much sinned-against Colt gun, they started over the -gangway bent upon paying their respects to the general commanding the -troops in the military district of Kapay. - -It was with a decided feeling of uneasiness that Phil sent his card by -the orderly to the general. He knew that Captain Blynn had before this -given his superior officer a full account of his expedition and he felt -sure that the escape of Martinez with his consequent blame had not -been forgotten in the telling. However, his high spirits could not be -easily dampened by even these sinister thoughts. His greatest ambition -had been achieved. Was he not the commander of an American man-of-war? -He was not even under the command of that awe-inspiring figure he could -see dimly at the desk, on whose shoulders the direction of an army -rested. - -In spite of this feeling of independence the lad’s pulse beat faster as -the orderly beckoned him to enter the general’s office. - -A short, sharp-featured officer, whose hair and beard were as white as -his spotless clothes, arose from his chair and gave a welcoming hand to -the visitors in turn, inviting them in silence to be seated. - -Phil fidgeted restlessly in his chair, while the general paced slowly -toward the open window and back again to his desk. Phil was on the -point of speaking several times, but each time he waited, seeing in the -army man’s face that he was about to speak. - -“Captain Blynn has made his report,” came in metallic tones from the -old campaigner, “and I am deeply distressed to hear that you, Captain -Perry, deliberately allowed a prisoner to escape; one whom above -all I wished to lay my hands on. Blynn is for asking the admiral to -court-martial you at once; but I am sure you must have some good reason -for your action.” - -He ended and glanced questioningly at the abashed Phil. - -“My reason was,” the lad blurted out, his feelings much hurt at the -severe arraignment, “that in order to capture Colonel Martinez, I would -have had to kill him in cold blood. I couldn’t bring myself to do it -for he had behaved handsomely toward us while we were his prisoners.” - -“But,” the general retorted, “Señor Espinosa would have saved you the -trouble if you had not interfered.” - -Phil’s wrath blazed forth. - -“How did I know that the man who was about to murder Martinez was a -traitor to his own people? I saw the two natives on the ground, one -with a knife upraised to bury it in the body of a man lying helplessly -beneath him, and then when I had separated them with the help of a -sailor, I saw that Martinez was armed, and I knew by a glance at his -face that he could not be taken alive.” The lad stopped suddenly, -the girl’s face coming suddenly before his eye. Did the general know -of her? He remembered that her presence at the scene had not been -mentioned. Had Espinosa failed to discover her presence? If not, why -had he failed to mention her in his report to Captain Blynn? - -General Wilson’s parchment-like face betrayed a suspicion of a smile -while he listened patiently to the midshipman’s impetuous defense of -his own actions. - -“Captain Perry,” he said slowly, “after you have been fighting these -natives longer your sensibilities will become more blunted. The excuse -of allowing an enemy to escape simply because you did not wish to kill -him would be laughed at by those who have been through these six months -of fighting. But,” he added, “I respect the delicacy of the situation -and shall tell Captain Blynn that I approve of your actions.” - -Phil’s gratitude was fully expressed in the look he gave the officer as -he murmured his thanks. - -“I do not wish you to believe,” the general added hastily, “that I -approve of useless bloodshed, but in a warfare such as has been forced -upon us the higher instincts of generosity to a fallen foe have but -small place. It is an eye for an eye with us now.” - -As the general finished speaking the adjutant-general, Major Marble, -entered and greeted the newcomers warmly. Both the lads had known him -in their Annapolis days. - -“Major Marble will give you the situation,” the general said as the -midshipmen shook his hand in parting. “I suppose you are ready to get -under way on summons.” - -Phil answered promptly in the affirmative. - -The major took the lads to his own comfortable quarters, facing the -Plaza, and then told them briefly of the perplexing conditions under -which the general was struggling. - -“The insurgents will only fight,” the major told them earnestly, “when -they can surprise us, and with these untrained volunteers that has been -very frequent of late.” - -The midshipmen told him how the American troops had marched -unsuspectingly past Colonel Martinez’s party the day before Captain -Blynn attacked them. - -Major Marble shook his head sadly. - -“Colonel Bane is not a soldier and never will be. He has blundered into -more traps than any officer in the island.” - -A heavy footfall sounded on the stairs. Major Marble stopped talking -suddenly, and walked quickly to the door as Captain Blynn’s stalwart -figure emerged from the stairway. “Come here, Blynn,” he called. - -The judge-advocate general approached; upon his face was a good-natured -smile which changed suddenly to an ugly frown as he caught sight of -his brother officer’s guests. He would have turned sullenly away, -but Major Marble put out a restraining hand. The lads had risen to -their feet. Phil felt his own face suffuse with blood as he caught -the glint of annoyance in Captain Blynn’s eyes. The midshipman turned -his back quietly and looked out the window. A moment later he heard -the captain’s heavy tread in the hall and a door slam loudly. When he -turned Major Marble’s face was pale and his blue eyes flashed angrily. - -“Blynn’s a boor, sometimes,” he hastened to apologize. “I’ve heard -the story. He’s so absorbed in his work that any one who thwarts him -arouses his dislike. He cannot see the human side. He’s a veritable -bull in a china shop. He and Espinosa are doing splendid service. All -of our success so far has been through their secret service work. -You’ll be friends after you’ve been here a while. Martinez’s escape -hurts his pride just now. Martinez is something like the man with the -iron mask. He comes from Luzon, but no one knows who he is. We have -wired Manila and they answer that they know of no insurgent officer -of that name. Yet he’s here, and from all accounts has been expected. -Most of his party were destroyed by Blynn, but about seventy-five -are believed to have escaped, and Espinosa says that his followers -are landing every day in the neighborhood of Dumaguete. I think the -general’s plan is to have you cruise off there in hopes of intercepting -some of their war parties.” - -Phil had composed his ruffled feelings and listened eagerly while Major -Marble was talking. His heart sank within him as there flashed through -his mind thoughts as to whom Martinez might be. Maybe no less a -personage than Aguinaldo himself, or General Rios, had been within his -grasp. Small wonder that Captain Blynn was put out at his escape. Yet -he could not have done otherwise with the girl’s beseeching, pleading -eyes upon him. - -After leaving Major Marble’s quarters the lads took a turn around -the small Spanish town, loitering before the many shops and gazing -admiringly up at the great churches, gray with age. They finally hired -a carramata, the native cab, and drove through the city and out on the -military road, begun by the Spaniards years before but, as was the -custom of the country, never finished. As they drove into the Plaza -on their return they came face to face with Señor Espinosa, riding a -blooded horse which was prancing and pawing the earth, and making vain -attempts to unseat its rider. Espinosa drew rein and bowed pointedly -and courteously to the Americans. - -“Señores,” he called eagerly, “may I have a word with you?” - -Phil ordered his cochero to stop, while Espinosa dismounted, throwing -his reins to a small native gamin near by. The native advanced to the -carriage hat in hand and with as much ceremony as if he were about to -speak to some exalted personage. - -“I am extremely mortified at my actions of yesterday,” he exclaimed in -his fluent and grandiloquent Spanish. “I have just seen the general. I -abjectly apologize for my rudeness. May I count upon the friendship of -the señores?” he asked in a suave, appealing voice. - -Phil flinched unconsciously. He felt as if some reptile was drawing him -toward him against his will. Espinosa’s eyes were mild and his smile -was urbane; yet he felt that treachery was hidden behind this mask of -friendliness. Espinosa read the struggle in the lad’s eyes and for an -instant the mildness died in his own and a savage gleam took its place, -but Phil’s gaze had wandered, and this vision of the true man was lost. - -“I don’t bear you any ill will for that,” Phil replied, his voice -unconsciously accenting the last word. “I suppose you felt you had been -cheated of your victory over Colonel Martinez.” Then the lad stopped -suddenly, a question trembling on his lips. Why should he not ask -it? Wherein was the harm? “Who was the girl with him?” Phil suddenly -questioned. - -Espinosa’s face paled and in his eyes fear crept. “The girl,” he -gasped, “was there a girl?” - -Phil nodded. “Yes, and her small brother; they came on the steamer with -us.” - -“And escaped with Martinez,” Espinosa exclaimed excitedly. “I didn’t -see her; it was too dark. While I was struggling I thought I heard a -woman’s scream, but afterward I saw only Martinez.” - -Phil saw the native was unduly agitated. What did it mean? How and why -had the presence of this woman so greatly excited him? - -As the midshipmen drove toward their ship this question was still in -Phil’s thoughts. - -“Is Espinosa playing a double game?” he asked Sydney suddenly. “Does he -fear detection by his own people? Does he believe that Martinez did not -recognize him and that his identity as a traitor is safe?” - -Sydney shook his head over the mystery. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -THE GUNBOAT COÖPERATES - - -As the two midshipmen stepped over the gangway of the “Mindinao” a -figure arose from a seat on the quarter-deck and hurried eagerly toward -them. - -“I’ve been waiting an hour for you,” Major Marble exclaimed excitedly. -“The general wants you to start as soon as possible for Binalbagan. -Baker’s men have had a fight; we got some news, and then the wire was -cut; our signal corps men have already gone out to find the break. -Tillotson and fifty men will be on board inside of an hour.” - -The midshipmen’s eyes opened wide with excitement. - -“We’re getting up steam, sir,” O’Neil volunteered. “I thought something -was in the wind when I seen the major come aboard, so I asked him and -he told me what we was to do.” - -“Good for you,” Phil exclaimed, throwing an appreciative glance at the -trusty boatswain’s mate. - -“Baker is in the field and a sergeant and twenty men are holding the -post,” Major Marble continued, “but if the natives are in great force -such a handful cannot last long.” - -An hour later, Lieutenant Tillotson, a thin, blonde-haired youngster, -marched his khaki-clad men on board and joined the little group of -officers about the table on the quarter-deck. - -Phil gave the young soldier a look of close scrutiny as he unbuckled -the revolver from about his slim waist and laid it on the hatch top. -There was nothing soldierly in the newcomer’s appearance, and Phil -unconsciously gave a sigh of disappointment. On the officer’s collar -between the crossed rifles was a single numeral. - -“And a regular, too,” he thought. - -“Good luck,” Major Marble cried as he passed over the gangway on to the -dock while the gunboat heaved up its anchor from the muddy bottom of -the river and steamed swiftly for the outer harbor. - -Phil studied carefully the chart in his miniature wheel house forward. -“Ninety miles,” he mused as he stepped off the distance to Binalbagan. -“At this speed we’ll be in by daylight.” - -The three sat long over their dinner on the cool quarter-deck, while -the gunboat sped rapidly along the coast of Kapay. Forward, the -soldiers and sailors fraternized, speculating upon the morrow’s work. - -The naval men’s faces were keenly excited. The long-looked-for fun had -commenced. They were almost willing to hope that Captain Baker’s men -were having a stiff time of it, so that the guns of their boat could -have a chance to speak their disapproval to the insurgents. Lieutenant -Tillotson sat coolly contemplating his coffee cup. To him these -expeditions meant but one thing: discomfort. - -“What’s the chance for a fight?” Sydney asked the army man. - -Tillotson shook his head. “None,” he replied, “unless we can catch them -by surprise. This gunboat would scare off an army of insurgents. They -don’t like them.” - -“But we shall surprise them,” Phil cried enthusiastically. “We’ll get -there before daylight, hit the enemy from behind and crumple him up. I -dare say, though, the fight will be finished before we arrive.” - -Tillotson shook his head. He was non-committal. “News travels fast in -this country, and it’s only twenty-five miles by road to Binalbagan,” -he said. - -“Have you been there?” Phil asked, all interest. - -“No,” Tillotson replied carelessly. - -“What is your plan?” Phil inquired quickly. - -Tillotson eyed the lad, his blue eyes wide with astonishment, while a -superior smile curved the corners of his mouth. - -“Plan?” he asked. “Why, just to land, that’s all; isn’t that enough?” - -“Yes, but,” Phil urged, “it’ll be dark, and if fighting is going on, -we may get between the two fires. I got myself in that fix once, and I -know how it feels.” - -Tillotson’s eyes opened wider. He took a closer look at this young -midshipman. - -“What does he know of being under fire?” he thought. Tillotson was a -first lieutenant; he had served in Cuba and in the Philippines, but -his active duty until his assignment to the regiment whose number he -now wore on his collar had been only at a desk at headquarters. - -“What service have you seen?” he inquired of Phil in a patronizing -voice. “Were you in the battle of Santiago, or Manila Bay, perhaps?” - -“No--not those,” Phil answered quickly, awe in his voice; “only a few -skirmishes, that’s all,” he added sheepishly, “in South America and in -China.” - -“Have we then had trouble in those places recently?” Tillotson inquired -in mild surprise, and in a voice calculated to annoy his listeners. - -“Not very lately,” Phil answered; “the South American trouble was -over a year ago and in China about six months ago. They were only -small rumpuses. I dare say you didn’t hear about them.” Phil’s pride -was touched, for he knew that many papers had given full and even -exaggerated accounts of both fights, and his name and Sydney’s had been -glowingly mentioned. - -“I suppose I must have been out in the field at the time,” Tillotson -explained indifferently, “so I didn’t see the papers.” - -“Hadn’t we best make up a plan of just how we’re going to do this -thing?” Phil urged, returning to his point and being guided by his -training at the Naval Academy, which had taught him to be methodical in -all things. - -Lieutenant Tillotson regarded the lad coldly. “You can plan for -yourself,” he replied. “I’ve been fighting these insurgents for some -months and my men know my plans by heart: they comprise just one word: -‘Forward.’” - -After the lieutenant had gone to his cot and was sound asleep, the -midshipmen adjourned to the brightly lighted chart house to discuss the -situation. - -“This rank business is what is hurting the army and navy too,” Phil -exclaimed testily. “Just because a man has one more stripe on his -sleeve he thinks he knows more than every one below him, and considers -a suggestion from a subordinate unpardonable insubordination, almost -akin to mutiny. Well, Mr. Tillotson can keep his own plan, but, Syd, I -am going to work out our end of it.” While Phil spoke he drew the chart -toward him and glanced carefully at the land in the neighborhood of -Binalbagan. - -“Do you see that marsh behind the town?” he exclaimed suddenly to -Sydney whose eyes were upon the chart. “That’s probably mangrove, and -they can’t get through that, so if they’re attacking, it’ll be from -the side. If Tillotson lands his men to the northward and we take a -position to the southward we ought to make a big haul. I told O’Neil to -have the Colt gun ready and if it comes out as I hope it will, we’ll -land it there,” pointing to a spot on the chart showing a low hill to -the left of the town. - -Sydney agreed heartily with Phil’s plans, and berated soundly the -attitude of the army man. - -“I suppose,” Phil said in apology for him as they parted, one to turn -in, the other to keep watch until midnight, “that he’s had so much -fighting he’s grown careless.” - -At midnight Phil was awakened, and relieved Sydney on the bridge, while -the latter went below to get a few hours’ sleep before he would be -needed in the work to be accomplished. Phil gazed through the darkness -ahead of the gunboat; the dim outline of the land along which they -were traveling could be seen on the port hand. The coast was bald and -he knew he could without danger run as close as he desired to its -precipitous cliffs. The more he thought of the scornful carelessness -of the young lieutenant the angrier he became. What right had he to -consider such an expedition one to require no plans? What if he landed -in an ambush? - -“He should consider the lives of his men,” he exclaimed hotly. - -The midshipman already knew that a large part of the garrison were -not at Binalbagan, having gone on an expedition to the north coast; a -sergeant and twenty men had remained to guard the men’s barracks and -supplies, to say nothing of the natives who had professed friendship to -the Americans and lived close under their protection. These poor souls, -Phil knew, were between two fires; if the soldiers were defeated they -would be killed by their enraged countrymen, while if their countrymen -claimed and received aid from them they would at once be put in prison -by the Americans, and yet if they refused to subscribe to the cruel -demands of the insurgents their lives would pay for their rashness as -soon as they wandered outside of their village. - -He paced restlessly the silent bridge. His men he could see sleeping -under the awning just below him. The man at the wheel, his eyes on the -compass, and the lookout on the forecastle were alone awake and alert. -The hours dragged by. A faint blush of dawn was visible on the eastern -horizon when Phil through his powerful night-glass could recognize the -chief landmark near the town of Binalbagan, a deep notch in the rugged -coast hills through which the river in the season of rains flowed to -the sea. It was as yet too dark to discover the town, and Phil knew -that the hull of the gunboat could not be seen from shore until the -sun had almost risen above the horizon. The last point of land was -rounded, and the gunboat’s bow was directed toward the locality where -he knew the town was even then in the throes of an attack from a savage -enemy. His heart rose in his throat as his mind dwelt upon the gruesome -possibilities if the handful of soldiers had been overpowered by their -numerous foe. It was almost with a sigh of relief that, as the gunboat -approached nearer the shore, he indistinctly recognized the faint -flashes of flame from rifle fire. At least the soldiers, or some of -them, were still alive. - -All hands had been called, and on the deck of the “Mindinao” there was -a scene of great activity. Boats were cast loose and supplied with the -accessories of war. A grim Colt gun was mounted on its tripod ready to -be carried ashore to hurl its five hundred shots a minute at the foe. - -Lieutenant Tillotson, after a rapid inspection of his men, approached -the two midshipmen on the bridge. Phil had slowed the gunboat. With -a leadsman in the chains, calling out the depth of water, he was -now steering directly for the small, serpent-like flashes showing -distinctly against the dark background of the hills. - -“It looks like a big fight,” Phil exclaimed excitedly as the lieutenant -reached his side. - -“These people make a lot of noise,” the latter replied nervously. “I -am not afraid of their rifles; the bolo is their weapon. By Jove!” he -exclaimed, after taking another long look at the scene. “It is a big -fight. I’d no idea they had so many rifles on the island. My fifty men -won’t be a drop in the bucket.” He turned upon Phil, alarm in his eyes. -“I shan’t land under that fire. Our men are doubtless intrenched in the -convent and can hold out till daylight, then when it gets light enough -to see, you can easily drive the insurgents off with your guns.” - -Phil gazed at the army man in undisguised surprise. What did he mean? -Was this the same Tillotson whose only order was “forward”? Here they -were, undiscovered, with fifty soldiers, a Colt gun and a gunboat. It -was a chance a landing party seldom had to deal its enemy a severe blow. - -“There must be five hundred riflemen surrounding the town,” Tillotson -continued, with more assurance, believing from Phil’s silence that he -had agreed with his plan of attack. “It would be foolhardy to risk my -men against such odds.” - -“He does think of his men, then,” Phil thought contemptuously. - -The gunboat had now stopped and lay motionless on the quiet sea. -Without orders four boats fully manned with ready sailormen were -noiselessly lowered from the davits. Stalwart arms lifted the Colt gun -and placed it in the bow of a cutter. Phil gave a last careful search -through his glass at the shore line, scarce a thousand yards away. -He could see the shadowy form of the big white cathedral from which -tongues of flame darted incessantly. To the right the long, low convent -building was silent. The soldiers had seized the church and inside its -shelter they were making their last stand. Phil was assured that they -would be safe until their ammunition was exhausted, and his experience -had taught him that soldiers in such straits, unless there was an -officer to control them, would use up their last cartridge before -thinking of the dire consequences. To husband ammunition was not their -concern. Even as the lad gazed the enemy’s flashes appeared closer to -the cathedral. They were closing in; a final rush might land these -savages under the very walls of the church. His hand shook violently -and almost a sob escaped him as a bright flame suddenly appeared on the -convent roof. - -“They have set the convent on fire,” Phil exclaimed in an awed whisper. -Then he turned fiercely on the army man. - -“What are your plans now?” he asked almost roughly. - -Lieutenant Tillotson drew himself up stiffly. - -“At sunrise all will be clear,” he angrily insisted. “It would be worse -than murder to land now; as you said last night,” he added, seemingly -grasping at a straw, “we would be between two fires.” - -Phil gave him an impatient glance. “Come on, Syd!” he exclaimed -eagerly, leading the way down from the bridge. - -O’Neil had his four boats ready at the gangway; two for the soldiers -and the others for the men of the gunboat who could be spared from the -guns. - -The lads gripped each other’s hand in silence as Phil stepped on the -gangway ladder leading to the boat. The soldiers by one accord had -crowded aft, their rifles in hand and cartridge belts bulging with -extra ammunition. Some had even filled the inside of their blue flannel -shirt with more precious cartridges. - -“Aren’t we going, sir?” the sergeant asked, gazing through the darkness -for his lieutenant. - -Phil shook his head. He was too angry to speak. Then suddenly without -command the soldiers filed, at first hesitatingly, casting anxious -glances behind them, into the awaiting boats. - -“Syd,” Phil said in a low, tense voice, “you know the plan. Keep those -cordite shells away from our own men. Get as close in as you can; don’t -hesitate to run her ashore if necessary. If I am not mistaken we’ve got -these natives in the closest box they’ve ever been in.” - -The four boats waited in silence at the gangway. Phil had taken his -place with O’Neil in the boat carrying the Colt gun. - -“Tell Lieutenant Tillotson we’re ready,” Phil said in his natural voice -to Sydney on the gangway. - -Lieutenant Tillotson strolled aft slowly, his eyes on the streak of -dawn ever increasing in the eastern sky. - -“Come on, Tillotson,” Phil said harshly; “we’ve wasted too much time -already.” - -Lieutenant Tillotson stopped on the gangway and glared angrily at the -composed midshipman below him. - -“I’d like to know,” he sneered, “what business a midshipman has to give -orders to his superior officer.” - -“I’ll give you one more chance, Tillotson,” Phil said in a stern, tense -whisper; he did not wish the men to hear. He could see even in the dim -light the surprised, incredulous look on the faces of his sailors. -“Will you please get aboard?” - -The lieutenant remained motionless, a dark scowl on his face. - -“Shove off,” Phil ordered harshly. - -The boats cleared the gangway. The sailors dipped their oar blades, -ready to follow the leading boat in which was Phil and the trusty Colt. - -“Come back here,” the lieutenant cried, seeing he had gone too far. But -Phil’s jaw was set and he turned to him a deaf ear. - -“It’s his own fault,” Phil confided to O’Neil at his side. “I didn’t -order his men in the boats; they got in without orders, as any decent -men would do. What is it, O’Neil, just pure cold feet?” he asked -suddenly. - -“Partly that, sir,” O’Neil answered, “but Lieutenant Tillotson is not a -coward; he’s just overcautious and a bit of a braggart. He didn’t like -attacking in the dark.” - -The four boats pulled with oars muffled in toward the dim shore. Phil -steered his boat for a point behind the long fringe of flashes, where -the insurgent firing line was established, creeping ever closer to -the handful entrenched behind walls that would soon be too hot to -hold them. He had abandoned his first plan and now was landing all of -his mixed command to the left of the town. If he could land without -discovery, the first the enemy would know of his presence would be the -horrifying, crackling report of the machine gun. - -“There, steer for that,” Phil breathed as a mound-like hill took shape -out of the darkness. - -With eyes straining and faculties alert for the first premonition of -danger, Phil directed his boat forward. The gunboat had been swallowed -up in the night astern. The shore grew more distinct. The church now -stood out prominently, silhouetted against the background of flames -from the burning convent. Even as he gazed the gun fire from the church -seemed to slacken and against the bright glow he could see indistinctly -natives swarming toward the burning building. Their number seemed -myriad; surely those could not be all riflemen. Then he turned cold as -he suddenly grasped the sinister meaning--they were bolo-men. For each -rifleman, at least four natives armed with bolos are assigned. They are -the guardians of the precious rifle. To obtain an insurgent gun, five -men must be slain. These men, armed with weapons in the use of which -every native is proficient, were advancing to rush upon the trapped -men when the heat of the fire and the smoke had driven them from the -shelter of the church’s protecting walls. - -So intent had Phil been that the boat, before he realized it, had -grounded on the sandy beach and the men had jumped overboard into the -shallow water. Once on the beach, he superintended the securing of the -boats and then led the way toward the point he had selected for the -first position to be occupied. The enemy were only a few hundred yards -away, but so intent were they on the accomplishment of their cruel -purposes, that the shadowy forms of the men from the sea, stealing -quietly through the short grass and against a background of darkness, -were not discovered. - -Phil’s quick eyes suddenly discovered some one approaching from a -direction away from the enemy. He gripped his revolver firmly, not -knowing how many more men might be behind the figure discovered. As the -Americans approached the newcomer, a native suddenly raised his hand -and called loudly: - -“Amigo, hua carta.”[2] - -A blow from O’Neil’s revolver butt was the answer, while Phil grasped -the letter which had been held in the stricken man’s hand, placing it -carefully in his breast-pocket. Then a warning cry rang out, followed -by a rifle-shot, the hot blast of which almost burned Phil’s cheek, -while a wiry form struck boldly right and left with his keen blade in -the very midst of the startled Americans. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -THE PRIVILEGES OF RANK - - -“There was two of ’em, captain,” the infantry sergeant exclaimed, in -that purely official calm voice for which the army non-commissioned -officers are noted even under the most trying and hazardous -circumstances, while he pushed away the body from beneath his feet, -after making sure the native was not shamming. “They was messengers, -telling the gugus of the coming of the gunboat, I reckon.” - -The small band of soldiers and sailors moved cautiously through the -rank grass and sparse cocoanut palms. The enemy before the town had -been too much occupied to discover the disturbance in their rear. - -Phil saw that the fire had grown apace and now the conflagration -threatened the entire town, but the greatest danger was to the church, -for the dawn breeze was carrying the hot, stifling smoke and flame -high on the church walls. It would be but a matter of minutes before -the church itself would be on fire. The sun was slowly approaching the -horizon; Phil saw the broad white band of light stretching across the -eastern sky. Out on the water to the right of the town the lofty spars -and smoke-stack of the “Mindinao” were indistinctly visible; Sydney was -ready to begin his allotted work when the day had broken so that he -could recognize friend from foe. - -“If that fellow Tillotson hadn’t funked,” the midshipman whispered -fiercely, his teeth set firmly, “and we could have had his men to the -right of the town, we could have flayed ’em alive. Now they’ll all -escape past the gunboat--unless we let the gunboat open the ball and -drive them all this way.--I’ll do it,” he cried determinedly. - -They had now reached the grassy-topped mound, the Colt gun placed in -battery, and the first string of cartridges fed into its steel maw. - -“Sergeant,” Phil commanded tersely, “deploy your men to the right and -left, and take shelter. Don’t fire without orders.” - -The sergeant saluted and gave a quick, sharp command. The soldiers -melted from sight. This was a new experience for them. Six months in -the islands and the only real fights they had seen were included in -a few shots at the disappearing brown men after they had fired their -volley from ambush, killing and wounding several of their comrades. Now -here were over five hundred yelling natives worked up to the wildest -pitch of savage triumph before their eyes, within range of their trusty -guns, and as yet no orders to fire. - -“Stop your grumbling,” O’Neil overheard the sergeant tell one of his -soldiers in language more forceful than polite. “This is something -that your thick skulls can’t savvy. It’s naval strategy. Wait till -the ball opens and every mother’s son of you can prove his claim to a -sharpshooter’s medal.” - -When all was ready, Phil could only wait patiently for the sun to give -Sydney enough light for his gunners to see to shoot, but meanwhile -he saw with ever-increasing impatience that the enemy was gradually -closing in about the church and convent. If the dawn were too long -coming! If the terrible, irresistible rush came before Sydney had -opened fire, then their attack would have failed, for the loss of -twenty American soldiers could not be repaid by the death or capture -of the whole insurgent army. It seemed to the awaiting midshipman that -hours must have passed since his men had entrenched themselves on this -small hillock. Surely the sun had stopped in its movement around the -earth! The flames in the town became higher and the smoke arose in -greater volume while the crackling of burning bamboo added its sinister -sound to the discharges of the rifles, ever drawing nearer the besieged -garrison. With heart beating rapidly and youthful indecision stamped on -his face, he gazed anxiously at the “Mindinao.” He breathed a sigh of -partial relief as he saw she was close inshore and was clearly visible. -Surely it was light enough to see, or if not yet the enemy must soon -discover the presence of the unwelcome and much-feared visitor. When -they fled, their retreat would be toward where he and his machine-gun -and sixty-five American rifles were awaiting them. - -Moisture stood out on the youngster’s forehead in great beads and his -tongue lay like cotton against the roof of his mouth. - -“I couldn’t have stood it another second,” he breathed, as a jet of -flame shot out from the gunboat’s bow and a sharp report followed by -thunderous reverberations awakened for the first time an unknown terror -in the hearts of the savage attackers, and brought courage and joy to -the hopeless men inside the stifling walls of the church. - -The little gunboat belched flame from her three-pounders and the eager -and delighted watchers on the mound of earth, clustered about the Colt -gun, gazed with admiration and awe as the high explosive shells tore -great gaps in the earth, scattering the demoralized natives in all -directions. The avenue of escape to the right was closed; the enemy -dared not approach nearer that death-dealing war-ship, and with one -accord, an uncontrolled, terrified mob of human beings, without method -or leaders, they turned and retreated directly toward the mound on -which Phil and his men were impatiently awaiting them. - -O’Neil had taken his place at the Colt gun. Seated in the bicycle -saddle, he squinted carefully down the massive rifle barrel, while -the seething mass of brown came ever closer. When the insurgents had -arrived at a distance of two hundred yards, Phil gave the order “Open -fire,” in a voice scarcely recognizable as his own, it trembled so with -excitement. - -Bang--bang--bang, faster than one could count, resembling the -explosions in the cylinders of a high power touring car, only -infinitely louder and more sonorous, the Colt gun hurled a solid leaden -stream of bullets into the charging mass. - -As coolly as if he were merely steering a boat, O’Neil played the -leaden hose on the startled enemy. They went down like chaff before the -reaper; while from behind urging them onward, the cordite shells of the -gunboat, which had followed them, burst with terrific havoc. - -Throwing down their rifles--it did not enter their heads to ask for -the quarter which the Americans would have been only too willing to -give--they turned inland directly toward the burning town. - -“Cease firing,” Phil cried out in alarm, as he saw suddenly appear, -almost in the path of the routed natives, the small band of men who -had come so near death at their hands. Rifles in hand, the relieved -soldiers advanced toward the now terrified insurgents and poured a -deadly fire into their already mortally stricken ranks. - -“Come on,” yelled Phil, leading the way on a run, followed by his men. -“We can bag them all in that swamp.” But the lad did not realize what -fear can do for a native Filipino. The Colt gun on the left where -O’Neil had advanced it on the run, and the rifles of the threescore -jubilant soldiers lent wings to their enemy’s feet as those finding -themselves miraculously spared from instant death plunged into that -impenetrable mangrove thicket. Volley after volley was fired in the -direction in which they had disappeared, and the crash of the bullets -could be distinctly heard, but no white man could have followed where -they fled. - -The sun was now above the horizon and the light of day showed a -gruesome sight to Phil’s eyes. Many hundreds of natives lay dead or in -their death agonies on the sandy soil. The doctor from the garrison -and his assistants attempted to help the sufferers, but after one -hospital man had been maimed for life by a wounded native to whom he -was administering, there could be little more to do. Graves were at -once dug in the little cemetery back of the church and there they were -placed one on top of the other in long rows and then the earth was -thrown on top and covered with rock to keep out the hungry mongrel -dogs, more savage even than their masters. - -The fight had hardly terminated before a small boat came quickly ashore -from the gunboat. Phil’s good spirits left him as he saw Lieutenant -Tillotson come swaggering up to the group of soldiers and sailors. -Sergeant Sweeney, who had been in command of the small garrison, -had been excitedly giving Phil the details of the attack, when the -lieutenant’s flushed, angry face brought him to a sudden stop. - -“Well, sergeant,” he cried in an insolent harsh voice, “make your -report to me; I am in command here; this man has no standing.” - -Phil was so stunned at the words that he didn’t understand or at least -realize its meaning. - -Then his righteous anger and loathing welled into his throat. - -[Illustration: “_I AM IN COMMAND HERE!_”] - -“How dare you talk of me that way before your men?” he cried, his face -pale as death, and his strong fists clinched. - -“Well, who are you, anyway?” Tillotson exclaimed swaggeringly. “A -midshipman!--ashore you have no status, so from now on please mind your -own business.” - -“Come on, sir,” O’Neil whispered, grasping firmly but respectfully -Phil’s arm. The sailor felt the lad’s muscles standing out like -whip-cords. He foresaw that something was about to happen. “Don’t spoil -all our fun, sir. If you hit him, which he richly deserves, you’ll lose -your ship, and where will Mr. Monroe and Jack O’Neil be then?” - -In spite of his anger and mortification the remark of his favorite -brought a faint smile to Phil’s face. - -“I guess you’re right, Jack,” he replied, his voice shaking with -emotion, calling him unconsciously by the name which he always used in -his thoughts, and allowed himself to be led away. - -The midshipman called his men together and walked quietly toward the -beach, while Lieutenant Tillotson took entire charge of gathering up -the spoils. - -“The lieutenant’s compliments, sir,” spoke an orderly at Phil’s side as -he was about to step into his boat to go to the “Mindinao,” where at -least he did have some status. “And he says, he orders you to send your -men to report to him to put things in order.” - -Phil turned on the messenger fiercely, and then in time remembered the -soldier was but the innocent bearer of this insolent command. - -“Come on, O’Neil,” the lad said with a tone of humiliation in his -voice, leading the way back toward the burning town. “I suppose I must -pocket my pride. I am only a midshipman, after all, and on shore here I -am under his orders.” - -After Sydney had anchored the gunboat he hailed a boat from the shore -and soon stood by Phil’s side. The fire was quite beyond their control -and inside of a few hours a great part of the nipa town was in ashes. -By almost superhuman efforts most of the supplies and ammunition of the -garrison were rescued, and piled in the little plaza in front of the -church, where tents were pitched and all preparations made to receive -the soldiers of Captain Baker when they returned from their expedition -to the northward. In interrupted and fragmentary sentences Phil told -Sydney of the insults offered him by the army man. Sydney’s eyes blazed -in anger. - -“The dastardly coward,” he exclaimed after the story had been unfurled -before him. “While you were risking your life, he was sitting on the -quarter-deck apparently glad to be in a place of safety, and now he -comes and wants to reap all the reward. I don’t see how he has the face -to appear before his men.” - -“He’s not a regular, anyway,” Phil exclaimed in a relieved voice. -“O’Neil says the sergeant told him he was some rich politician’s son, -a black sheep, appointed in a regular regiment. That explains him -somewhat.” - -“He’s a yellow dog, that’s what he is,” Sydney exploded, “and I’d like -to tell him so to his face, and I will, the first chance I get.” - -“No, you won’t, Syd,” Phil said firmly; “remember ashore here we’re -under his orders. Don’t give him an opportunity to make it unpleasant. -It’s bad enough as it stands. - -“There’s where we can be of service,” he suddenly exclaimed as his eye -followed the trailing end of a wire. “The telegraph instruments were -saved and are over there in the grass; we’ll connect up and see if we -can get Palilo.” - -After a half hour’s work with the help of the single signal corps -man, the instrument had been remounted inside of a tent and the lads -watched eagerly as the operator endeavored to call up headquarters. The -instrument clicked rhythmically for a fraction of a minute and as it -ceased the receiving relay clicked loudly in return. - -“The line’s O. K., sir,” the soldier said as his hand rested on the -sending key, and he looked up for orders. “Shall I tell Palilo that -we’re all right?” - -Phil was about to answer when he suddenly remembered the stinging words -of the lieutenant. Pocketing his pride once more he shook his head. -“Report to the lieutenant that the line is through,” he said as the two -lads turned away. - -A few moments afterward, while they stood outside the tent they heard -the clicks of the sending key. Each listened intently; not with any -idea of eavesdropping but because on board ship it had been a custom -formed in their Annapolis days to read all signals. In this way they -both had perfected themselves in all forms of signaling and could read -in all codes. - - “_To Adjutant-General, Palilo_: - - “I attacked insurgents besieging garrison at daylight. Placing the - gunboat on one flank, I sent guard with Colt gun on the other. Attack - was a perfect success. We have captured nearly two hundred rifles. We - have no casualties. Baker still away. - - “TILLOTSON.” - -The midshipmen read the message, their eyes opening wide with wonder as -the busy little instrument proceeded. - -“Well, of all the nerve!” Phil exclaimed as the signature was reached. -“I attacked, I placed the gunboat, I sent guard. But where was he?--he -doesn’t say, does he!” - -At noontime the midshipmen found themselves unwilling guests at -Lieutenant Tillotson’s table for the midday meal. Phil had asked -permission to withdraw his men on board ship but the lieutenant had -curtly refused. - -Napkins were a luxury not supplied, and after finishing his dinner, -consisting of wholesome army rations, Phil drew out of his pocket his -handkerchief to use in place of the missing square of linen. The letter -taken from the dead native fell at his feet. The excitement and worry -of the last few hours had driven the knowledge of its presence from his -mind. - -Tillotson’s keen eye was upon the letter and he stretched out his hand -for it in stony silence. Phil gave it up instantly. The lieutenant -broke the seal and ran his eyes quickly over its contents. His face -showed keen interest as he read; then he put the letter carefully -into his own pocket. The midshipmen regarded him with interest, half -expecting to hear the purport of its contents; but were disappointed, -for in a few minutes he arose and left them without a word. - -“The rest of the garrison are returning, captain,” O’Neil announced, -joining the midshipmen after his dinner with the soldiers. “You can see -their dust down the beach.” - -The lads watched with ill-concealed delight, much to Tillotson’s -discomfiture, the arrival of Captain Baker and his eighty dust-covered -soldiers. As they swung into the Plaza, apparently for the first time, -they realized that something extraordinary had happened, for they -quickened their pace and Captain Baker, unable to control his anxiety -further, shouted eagerly to ask what had happened. - -Tillotson, assurance in his every motion, walked out to meet him. - -Phil could not refrain from comparing these two figures--one that of -Captain Baker, alert, muscular, tanned by the sun, his uniform dirty -and stained by travel, with grime on his soldierly countenance, while -the other, slender, his clothes neat and of a dandified cut, seemed -more in place in a drawing-room than in the jungles of the Philippines. - -“I saw the gunboat when we struck the beach below there,” Captain Baker -exclaimed, his anxiety relieved after Tillotson had assured him all was -safe, and he advanced hand outstretched, a hearty smile of greeting on -his strong face. “Is this the new captain of the ‘Mindinao’? I am glad -to meet you both,” he said as he shook the hands of the midshipmen in -turn. “I suppose we are once more indebted to the navy.” - -Tillotson frowned. “I have fifty men with me,” he exclaimed -protestingly. “Of course the gunboat was useful in bringing us here and -shelling the beach.” - -“What’s become of all the town natives?” Captain Baker asked suddenly. - -“They all left town yesterday morning,” the sergeant replied. “That’s -how we knew that all was not going just right.” - -“The cowardly beggars!” Captain Baker exclaimed. “You’d have thought we -were their best friends. Well, I suppose they’ve got to look out for -themselves. Have you buried all the bodies?” he asked suddenly. - -“Yes, sir,” Tillotson replied, “but your sergeant has the names of all -those he recognized; apparently there were some of the town people in -the attack.” - -Captain Baker nodded his head, a sorrowful expression on his face. “Who -can we trust among these people?” he said in a low voice as he scanned -the list handed him. “Even my own servant against us. Pedro might have -stuck a knife in me any night he wished.” - -“A telegram, sir,” the captain’s orderly announced handing him a sheet -of paper. - -“Send gunboat ‘Palilo.’ If desirable retain Tillotson and men.” - -Captain Baker read the message aloud, then his soldier eye gazed -intently at the lieutenant. The inspection from the expression on the -captain’s face had not been reassuring; however, in a second he turned -a smiling face to Phil. - -“Captain Perry, I am sorry I am not to have the pleasure longer; -however, I am deeply grateful to you and the navy for saving my men. -Tillotson, you can return; I’ll keep your men.” - -Lieutenant Tillotson’s face, which had become sorely troubled as the -telegram had been read, suddenly cleared. Phil felt that he would -have died if a soldier of Captain Baker’s standing and reputation -had even hinted at his uselessness, as he had at this hard-skinned, -self-satisfied lieutenant. - -After a night’s run the “Mindinao” was again tied up to the dock at -Palilo. On the trip down the lads had left their unpleasant passenger -severely alone, while he had spent his evening writing, filling sheet -after sheet of paper with closely spaced lines. - -“Official report of a spectator,” Sydney whispered loud enough -purposely for Tillotson to hear. The latter looked up and scowled. - -After breakfast the next morning Phil reported at the general’s office. -Major Marble received him with a grave face. - -“For the land’s sake, Perry! What have you done to Tillotson? He -denounces you in scathing terms in his official report to the general; -accuses you of weakening his authority before his men; humiliating him -on your own ship; deliberately shoving off from the ship without him -because he did not approve of the entire plan which you devised without -his concurrence, and lastly reports you for insubordination when under -his orders ashore and treating your superior officer with contempt. In -fact,” Major Marble ended, “he has started at the top and gone to the -bottom of all the military offenses.” - -Phil gasped in astonishment. Major Marble stood gazing compassionately -at his young friend, apparently hoping to hear him clear up the -mystery. But Phil was silent. He must have time to think. - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -THE KATIPUNAN SOCIETY - - -After Phil had reached his ship he scarcely remembered how he had -behaved to his anxious and sympathetic friend, Major Marble. The boy’s -mind was dazed. He had not believed that Tillotson would dare make -charges against him, but now that they had been made, how should he -act? The mere words of each charge were only too true but Phil felt -that he had had strong and sufficient reasons for acting as he did. But -now he must refute these charges or else go before a court-martial. -But how could he refute them? There was but one way and that was to go -to General Wilson and tell his story, which would be corroborated by -Sydney. It would be tantamount to telling the general that one of his -officers was an arrant coward and unfit to be trusted with hazardous -expeditions. And even then the charges would still hold. They were true -in substance, every one of them. As commanding officer of a gunboat -Phil was within his rights when he laid his plans as to where the -attack of the gunboat should be and the locality to land his own men; -but he could only advise the army man from his nautical experience as -to where the best place would be to land the soldiers in order that -their coöperation might be harmonious. Lieutenant Tillotson was free to -accept his suggestions or refuse them as he saw fit. So long as they -were both afloat the army officer could give no orders to him, nor -could Phil give orders to his superior in rank. To the anxious lad it -was certainly a perplexing situation. His conscience was quite clear -upon the soundness of the plan he had proposed, and he felt that in -carrying it out they had struck a severe blow at the insurrection and -had saved the beleaguered garrison. The lieutenant’s action might in -feeble minds be excused through the plea of caution, but no strong man -would hesitate to say that it was a case where caution should not have -been considered. - -Sydney was beside himself with indignation when he learned of the -spiteful charges of the lieutenant and was for seeking him out and -bestowing personal vengeance, but Phil dissuaded him from any such rash -act. - -“I should have ordered his men out of the boats,” Phil said bitterly, -“when I saw Tillotson was not coming. We might have won without them, -although they were a great comfort, and if the Colt gun had gone back -on us they would have been a necessity.” - -“What will you do?” Sydney asked, exasperated at the apparent -indecision of his friend. “Tell the straight story to the general and -he’ll make it hot for that dandified gentleman soldier.” - -“The worst of it is,” Phil replied gravely, “Tillotson is the son of -an influential man in the Philippine government, and if he takes our -part the general will incur the father’s displeasure, for a father will -never believe wrong of a son. A general has been suspended for less, -and that would ruin his army career. I think our best plan is to try to -compromise with Tillotson, and if he won’t listen to reason then ask -the general to send us to another part of the island.” - -Major Marble, as much as he disliked the task, was in duty bound -to hand this report to the general through his judge-advocate -general. Captain Blynn believed he was a fair man and was proud of -his reputation of being scrupulously honest, yet when he read this -arraignment of the young midshipman, a smile, almost of pleasure, -passed over his face. Here was a case in which he took the greatest -delight. The captain instinctively disliked Tillotson. He saw that he -did not have the making of a soldier, and this expedition had been one -of the few with which he had been entrusted. On another occasion his -command had suffered severely from an ambush of bolo-men, and there had -been vague rumors that Tillotson had not behaved as it was traditional -a ----th Infantry officer should, but there had been nothing official, -thanks doubtless to his father’s influence. As Captain Blynn read he -recognized the work of a law graduate. Each charge was described at -length in an enclosed letter. Undoubtedly the circumstances were true. - -“Queer youngster, that fellow Perry,” Captain Blynn exclaimed almost in -admiration as he finished and folded the communication preparatory to -laying it before his chief. “He’s got grit, but I fear bad judgment. -I could never see why he allowed that Martinez to escape. Espinosa -says it was deliberate. Well, he must pay for his ill-judged acts. I -don’t want any one about here who’s going to have qualms of conscience -about killing a Filipino who won’t surrender. He handled that attack at -Binalbagan splendidly, though,” he thought. “But I am afraid we’ve got -to make an example of him.” - -As Captain Blynn approached the general’s office, he caught the sound -of voices from within, and soon saw that the midshipman himself was -talking earnestly with the general. Captain Blynn was not deterred; -with him business was business and here was the officer charged with a -grave offense. - -“I have a letter here, sir,” he said in his cold, official voice -addressing his chief, “written by Lieutenant Tillotson, making very -serious charges of misconduct against Midshipman Perry.” - -“Captain Perry has just told me that he had heard of these charges,” -the general replied in an annoyed voice. “It seems to me, Perry, you -have stirred up quite a hornet’s nest in the few days you have been in -Kapay.” - -Phil blushed furiously, and his eyes flared forth his indignation at -such an unfair remark. Especially as he could make no answer to an -officer of such rank. - -The general adjusted his glasses and read from beginning to end the -report placed on his desk by the captain; then he glanced up, a puzzled -look on his deeply lined face. - -“This is a very ugly business,” he said sharply. “We have no time to -investigate such matters. We are busy putting down this rebellion. Yet -such conduct as charged in this report, Mr. Perry, cannot go unheeded. -There’s but one thing to do,” he continued after a moment’s thought. -“Wire to the admiral at Manila and request your detachment for private -reasons.” - -“That would be a tacit acknowledgment that I am in the wrong,” Phil -cried out, his voice trembling with anger at the injustice in the -general’s words. - -“Read this letter,” the general said brusquely, “and if you can clear -yourself do so before Captain Blynn and myself.” - -Phil took the letter and read page after page of incriminating evidence -against him. It told of the disagreement as to the plan of landing and -the time of landing. Then of the departure of the expedition from the -gunboat, when the accuser claimed that Phil had deliberately shoved off -without him, “doubtlessly jealous of being outranked,” the report read. -Then of his insubordination ashore after the attack when he, Tillotson, -had taken charge of the work of clearing up the battle-field. Of the -withdrawal of the sailors and their refusal to help until an imperative -order had been sent the midshipman not to go to the gunboat, but to -return and give aid to the soldiers. - -Phil’s heart thumped as he read. The report was untrue in so far as -the imputations on his reasons were concerned, but the incidents were -only too true, and except by bringing a charge of cowardice and calling -soldiers and sailors to corroborate him, he could not deny the report. -Tillotson’s report stated further that both midshipmen had during the -return trip acted toward him in a manner which lessened the respect of -the sailors for him. That one of them had made remarks derogatory to -his character as a soldier. - -Phil handed the report back, his eyes swimming. His anger was rife -within him and he dared not speak. - -“This is a case for a Court of Inquiry,” Captain Blynn said to the -general, “but I cannot see how an army court can decide on the case of -a naval officer. Mr. Perry apparently cannot deny these charges, so -if he is disinclined to wire the admiral, I suggest that you send a -message asking to have him relieved.” - -The general nodded his head in the affirmative and Captain Blynn -withdrew to prepare the fatal telegram. - -“I am sorry, Mr. Perry,” the general said, his face softening. “I have -heard of your fight, and it was a masterpiece. I believe you have the -stuff in you; but insubordination cannot be condoned. You must learn to -obey and be respectful to officers higher in rank.” - -“Why couldn’t he tell the general just how everything had happened?” he -thought as he listened to the kindly voice, “not to ask that he might -retain his ship but simply to clear his name of this cloud.” - -Captain Blynn appeared, telegram in hand, which he laid before the -general for his signature. - -“Before I send this,” the latter said turning to Phil, “see Lieutenant -Tillotson yourself, and if he is willing to withdraw this report I -shall forget the incident.” - -Phil left the office, knowing that it was but a respite. He had passed -Tillotson on the street when on the way to the general’s office and had -saluted and spoken, but his greeting had been ignored. - -It was dark when Phil left the headquarters building and walked toward -the docks. As he passed slowly through a narrow street, the forbidding -windowless walls towering over him with here and there a dark alleyway, -where an assassin might lurk, he instinctively felt for the handle of -his navy revolver lying in its holster slung to his left hip. At the -end of the street near the river and but a few paces from the gunboat -he saw a calesa drawn up, its curtains drawn closely, just beyond the -glare of a street lamp, and he was surprised to see a hand wave to him -from the gloom inside. - -Stepping cautiously to the side of the awaiting vehicle, he heard his -name called in a familiar woman’s voice. It was the unknown girl of the -“Negros.” - -“Señor Perry, may I speak to you?” she inquired excitedly in Spanish. - -Phil took her outstretched hand eagerly, forgetting for the moment his -own trouble. - -“What is it, señorita?” he asked eagerly. - -“Come to-night to the northeast corner of the Plaza, at nine o’clock; -bring some of your men with you. Maria Rodriguez will show her -gratitude to the brave American officers.” He would have detained her, -to learn more, but her sharp command to the alert driver had come -before he could recover from the startling summons and the next moment -the calesa was racing madly up the street. - -Full of his news, he boarded the gunboat and confided to Sydney the -girl’s message. - -“Maria Rodriguez,” Sydney exclaimed. “She’s the daughter of Juan -Rodriguez, the wealthiest Filipino in Kapay. I wonder what’s up? Her -father, you know, refuses to join the insurgents, and yet will not aid -the Americans, and the general will not molest him. He lives on his -estates just beyond the city on the river.” - -O’Neil was summoned and told to make up a party of five good men to -accompany them and then the midshipmen sat down to dinner; but neither -had an appetite for food. - -Phil told Sydney of the outcome of his visit to the general and the -latter was cast down with gloom. - -“I shan’t stay without you,” he asserted. “Can’t something be done? Is -there no way to make this man Tillotson back down?” - -Phil shook his head. “I shan’t try. I’ll just take my medicine. It’s -bitter, but every one who was there knows that he was in the wrong.” - -Nine o’clock saw the small party at the northeast corner of the Plaza. -The city seemed deserted. There was no one on the streets. Suddenly -the clanking of a sword was heard and the sailors slunk quietly out of -sight into the shadow of a near-by doorway. - -“It’s Lieutenant Tillotson,” Phil whispered, “inspecting sentries; he’s -officer of the guard to-night.” - -After the officer had passed, the party waited anxiously for several -minutes and then a native appeared walking slowly toward them from a -cross street. He stopped fifty yards away and beckoned; then turned -quickly and walked away. - -Phil and Sydney leading, they followed the vanishing figure ahead of -them. He guided them through street after street, leading farther and -farther away from the occupied part of the city. Suddenly the native -stopped, beckoned with his hand, and entered a doorway of a pretentious -Filipino dwelling. - -“Your men must wait here, señor; it is the señorita’s order,” the -native told the lads. “The officers are to come with me.” He raised his -finger to his lips to caution silence. “If we are discovered it will -mean death, señor.” - -“What’s the game, sir?” O’Neil asked eagerly, not having heard the -whispered words of the native. - -“You’re to stay here out of sight,” Phil explained quietly. “If we need -help I’ll fire my revolver.” - -With a parting caution the midshipmen stealthily followed their guide -up the street, hugging the dark shadow of the houses, and entered the -wide archway of a large native building. Inside was total darkness, and -it needed all their confidence in the girl who had invited them to come -to still their awakening suspicions. - -The guide gave a low whistle and the slight sound caused their hearts -to beat faster amid the profound silence within. - -“Señores, you have come,” a woman’s musical voice dispelled their -fears. “Please step this way; I am sorry there can be no light.” - -Phil quietly led the way in the direction of the voice, and his eyes -soon discerned the figure of the girl, a darker object among the -surrounding gloom. He felt a warm, confiding hand in his, and allowed -himself to be led deeper into the blackness of the building. - -The midshipmen followed blindly; their eyes, unaccustomed to the -darkness, could see nothing. They knew from an occasional contact -with a wall that they were in a narrow passage and from the damp odor -they knew it must be some depth below the ground. Several times their -heavily shod feet slipped on the muddy floor, and occasionally they -could hear the tinkly drip of water. The passageway led gradually -downward, the dampness increasing. - -Finally the girl stopped and the sound of the heavy breathing of the -four people filled the narrow limits of their surroundings. - -“These are underground passages, built years ago during a threatened -uprising of the natives against the Spaniards,” Señorita Rodriguez -whispered. “This passage leads to the secret chamber of the ‘Sociedad -de Katipunan.’ To be present at a meeting the penalty for a non-member -is to take the oath or suffer death. Only the direst necessity has -brought me here to-night. I have no right to ask you, señores,” she -said pleadingly, “to take this great risk for my sake, and if you so -decide we can now turn back. Lopez, my father’s trusted patron, will go -with me.” - -“We will go with you, señorita,” Phil answered without a second’s -hesitation. “What are we to see?” he asked, unable to control his -curiosity at the mystery of it all. - -“Come, you shall discover for yourself,” she said as she moved forward, -her hand still in Phil’s, while Sydney held his companion by the coat -sleeve and Lopez, as noiseless as an Apache, brought up the rear. “The -meeting will not take place for some time, and meanwhile we shall have -time to talk.” - -Silently they moved forward until presently, from the sound of their -footfalls, Phil knew that the walls had receded and that they had -entered a large chamber. - -“The stairs, señor,” Maria whispered, and the lads found themselves -mounting earthen steps. Again their feet struck wooden boards and they -knew that they had ascended from the passage and were in a large room -directly over the one which they had just left. - -“This is the old Spanish inquisition room,” the girl said in a low -voice, “and a fitting meeting-place for the Katipunan murderers. But -come, they may be here any moment.” - -Phil admired the daring of this frail girl. She had led them into the -very nest of these traitorous outlaws, for it now dawned upon him what -was the true meaning of these meetings. - -“Do they enter the same way as we have come?” he asked anxiously, -casting an apprehensive glance behind him. - -“No,” Maria answered, a smile on her face as she felt the lad’s hand -tremble imperceptibly on her own. “We are not in the room; it is beyond -us, as you shall see soon. We are in a covered gallery which is secret -and known to but few even of the society. The passage through which -we came has not been used for years, and until last night was closed -with earth. Lopez has spent all day with some of his most trusty men -clearing it in order that we might pass.” - -Phil cautiously peered about him, but his eyes could not penetrate -the darkness. He knew that his feet were on boards, and that his hand -rested upon a wall which was rough and dry. Then suddenly as if by a -flash of lightning a vivid picture of his surroundings was shown him. - -“They are coming,” Maria whispered in a startled voice. “Lie down and -for your life do not speak.” The next second all was again blackness. -The lads and their companions had noiselessly thrown themselves down on -the floor and were holding their breath in an agony of suspense. The -cool handle of Phil’s revolver, which he had unconsciously drawn from -its holster, brought back his confidence. At least they would not die -without some injury to their enemy. - -Again came the flash of light; it flickered and seemed on the point of -extinction, and then continued dimly. Phil recognized that this time -the match had not gone out in the room over which their gallery looked, -and that a candle was dimly burning. Then another and another candle -was lighted and little by little the great room was exposed to their -view. - -Figures of men could be seen clustered about a table in the far end -of the hall, some seated in chairs, but most of them on the ground in -native fashion, while beyond the table was a niche in which an image -glittered. The midshipmen soon discovered that it was an exaggerated -emblem of the Katipunan society which they had seen on insurgent flags; -the sun within a flaming triangle, all of pure silver. - -A noise of feet and guarded voices came to their ears as the room -slowly filled with men. As the light from the many candles shone upon -their faces the anxious watchers saw that each man was masked. - -After an interminable interval of time all was hushed and a man arose -from a seat near the symbol of the society and beckoned one of the -others to approach. - -Phil felt the girl beside him tremble violently, and give a sharp gasp -of pain. - -“Garcia,” she breathed, “my father’s trusted friend.” - -“Our unknown brother,” the leader said in Spanish, which Phil was to -learn was the accepted language of the society, “has been summoned to -join our society; his name is recorded secretly in the recording book; -his number is one thousand and ten.” The leader then drew from his -scabbard a sharp glistening bolo and circled it with the adroitness -of a juggler about the head of the newly enrolled member. Gradually -one after another of the masked natives arose, their keen-bladed bolos -held aloft, while in single file they moved slowly with a rhythmical -dancing step toward the silent “one thousand and ten.” As they advanced -a weird chant broke from twoscore throats. It was not loud, but the -volume filled the high vaulted chamber and lent an uncanny air to the -mysterious initiation. It seemed to Phil as he watched, his eyes -fairly bulging from their sockets, that the unfortunate man would -surely be severed into a thousand pieces by these fierce, savage -fanatics, but he stood silent, his arms folded across his breast, while -his eyes gleamed in exultant excitement. - -Slowly the members danced by their new comrade and returned to their -seats. - -Then the new member, by sign from the leader, advanced and prostrated -himself before the emblem. - -“The sign of giving his life to the cause,” Maria whispered. Then she -stiffened and a stifled sob broke from between her clenched lips as the -voice of the speaker filled the room. - -“Rodriguez has refused the summons. He is no longer our friend. He has -gone over to the despised Americans. Through him our men were attacked -and killed at Banate, and also at Binalbagan. He holds his servants -from joining our cause only through fear. Once he is removed they will -all join us.” - -“It is all untrue!” Maria’s voice, clear, low, and distinct, sounded -through the room, and at once the assemblage was on its feet, gazing -distrustfully at each other. Phil’s hand had grasped the girl’s arm -with a grip of steel, fearing that in her indignation and anger she -would expose herself to the view of these twoscore traitors. - - - - -CHAPTER X - -IN THE SHADOW OF A SUSPICION - - -Phil’s heart beat tumultuously as he laid a restraining hand on Maria’s -arm to prevent her from rising up from the floor of the gallery. The -instant the girl’s indignant, vibrating voice was heard an uncanny -silence fell upon the masked men. Each looked fearfully at the other. -Every man mistrusted his neighbor. The girl’s heavy breathing sounded -ominously loud in the lad’s ears, and he was dumb with apprehension -that she would sacrifice them all by a second outburst of passionate -denial. They dared not move. There was naught to do but wait. If the -society determined upon a search then their one chance was to make -a dash for the passageway, and hold the angry men at bay with their -revolvers. O’Neil and his five men were near the entrance, and Phil -felt sure that their cause was not altogether desperate. - -After an interval that seemed hours the leader’s voice broke the heavy -silence. - -“Who dared deny that Rodriguez has betrayed his people?” he cried. - -Phil’s strong fingers pressed firmly the girl’s arm and his eyes begged -obedience. - -The masked men sat as if turned to stone. No sound broke the stillness. - -A loud knock on the door behind the speaker brought the assemblage to -their feet in sudden fear. Phil saw that many had drawn their bolos, -while others stood ready to extinguish the long rows of candles. - -A challenge was called and answered, and the next second the door was -opened from within and a native entered. Phil beheld in admiration -the air of grace and fearlessness while he advanced boldly toward the -startled leader. - -A smothered exclamation from Maria caused the lad’s eyes to travel -quickly to her face. She was staring, a horrible dread stamped on her -face, while she murmured in a trembling voice: “Mi Padre!” - -So this was Juan Rodriguez, who had been denounced but a moment since -by the terrible Katipunan society, come to answer in person to the -charge! - -Another native followed him closely; neither were masked, and Phil -recognized, in startled wonder, Colonel Martinez. - -“Fellow countrymen,” Rodriguez exclaimed in a loud, commanding voice, -“I have obeyed your summons, but I shall not join the society. I -shall never take sides in this war until I feel in my heart that to -do so will better my countrymen. You who are deceiving the Americans, -pretending that you are loyal and yet aiding your countrymen to kill -them, doubtless believe that you are doing your country a service, but -I know that in the end you will bring terrible suffering on our people. -Take the field and fight openly and honorably, and you will be treated -by your enemy as a brave antagonist, but fight with a knife, stabbing -your enemy in the back, under the guise of friendship, and the end is -surely the gallows tree.” - -A murmur of harsh voices filled the room as Rodriguez stopped speaking. - -All eyes were turned to this striking figure, as the light from many -candles revealed the finely moulded face, flashing eyes and firmly -chiseled lips and chin. - -As Phil watched, his eyes opened wider in dread. The leader had edged, -during the long speech, nearer and yet nearer to Rodriguez. Martinez -was standing silently on the other side. Phil’s anxious gaze caught -the flash of brightly polished steel in the hands of this masked -native, now but a few feet from his intended victim. Maria saw, but her -voice was frozen within her. Phil gauged the distance to the would-be -murderer, for his intention was only too evident. It was not over fifty -paces. Surely it was possible; he had often practiced at that distance. -His revolver was now pointing at the Katipunan leader, whose hand could -be seen to be stealthily rising. Phil steadied one shaking hand with -the other and pulled the trigger. The loud report of the discharge -was deafening, and below in an instant all was the wildest confusion. -Swiftly all lights were extinguished and the room was plunged into inky -darkness. - -“Come,” Phil urged excitedly, “we must get O’Neil and save Juan -Rodriguez.” - -Blindly they felt for the stairs and quickly descended; then hand in -hand they ran along the dark, slippery tunnel. Reaching the street Phil -gave a low whistle, which soon brought O’Neil and his men. - -“Did you fire a shot?” the sailor asked anxiously. “We thought we heard -one, but it seemed a long ways off.” - -“Yes,” Phil replied, “but follow us; there’s work to be done; the -señorita’s father is in danger.” - -Led by the native, Lopez, each sailor with his revolver drawn sped -down the narrow street. At the corner they saw a small band of men -approaching. Phil halted his party and waited ready to attack if they -turned out to be enemies. The next moment Maria had thrown herself -into her father’s arms, and was sobbing hysterically, while his native -followers withdrew to some distance and stood on guard in respectful -silence. - -Phil and Sydney wrung the hand of their former captor Martinez. - -“What would Captain Blynn say now?” Phil exclaimed laughingly as O’Neil -too squeezed the colonel’s hand until the latter winced. “He’d shoot us -for traitors sure.” - -Sydney smiled. “It would be rather difficult to explain the situation,” -he replied, the drollness of the meeting suddenly striking him. - -“You saved my life, señor,” Rodriguez exclaimed suddenly, as Maria led -him to the Americans. “My daughter has told me all. I do not know how -she could have gone where she did, or how she found out that I had been -summoned, but bringing you there has shown that often one’s greatest -enemy lives in one’s house and eats his bread. I came this evening -bringing with me my own men, for I know these blackguards too well to -trust myself alone. As all were masked I recognized no one, but I have -suspicions as to many and especially he who you probably have killed, -for he fell limply at my feet just before the lights were extinguished.” - -A sudden pang of remorse came into Phil’s thoughts. - -“Colonel Martinez came with me as my friend and protector,” said -Rodriguez, “and although he is an enemy within your lines I ask that he -be allowed to withdraw in safety. You see,” he added with a smile, “we -had no idea of meeting those who would recognize him.” - -Phil as the leader of the Americans gave a ready assent. He well knew -that a strict interpretation of his duty required that he arrest -Colonel Martinez on the spot and take him prisoner before the general, -but intuitively he realized that to do so would hurt the American -cause. He felt that Rodriguez had reached a crisis in his avowed -intention of neutrality. By arresting Martinez after this appeal Phil -might lose the government a valuable friend, now wavering between his -loyalty to his own people and the more earnest duty of fighting against -them to protect them from the domination of this treacherous band of -murderers. - -“Good-bye, señores,” Maria cried eagerly, as her father signified his -intention to depart. “I can never thank you enough for what you have -done to-night. If your bullet,” she added earnestly, “has silenced -forever that terrible leader of the Katipunan society, my father will -be in no further danger.” - -“Can you pass through the lines?” Sydney asked, “or shall we vouch for -you?” - -“If it is not too much trouble,” Rodriguez replied gratefully. “My -carriage is just there, and we are then near the last patrol. The -general has allowed me free conduct always, but this disturbance may -have aroused suspicion, so I shall be grateful for your services.” - -The mixed party of sailors and natives walked briskly through the -silent streets. The carriage drawn by two fast horses was reached, and -Maria, her father, and Martinez entered, while Lopez mounted the box -and drove slowly forward followed by the Americans on foot. - -A loud American challenge suddenly brought the horses on their haunches. - -“Halt! Who comes there?” - -“Officer,” answered Phil. - -“Advance one, and be recognized,” the sentry called. - -Phil walked slowly forward until he was within ten paces of the alert -soldier. - -“Halt.” - -Phil stopped in his tracks. - -“I guess you’re a naval officer,” the soldier said in a puzzled voice. -“You’re too young to be a brigadier-general, although you’ve got a star -there on your shoulder-strap.” - -Phil smiled. - -“Yes, sentry, I am Captain Perry of the gunboat.” - -“Sure, sir, you can pass me, any time,” the soldier exclaimed gladly. -“That was certainly great work you done in Binalbagan. All the boys is -talking about you two officers and Jack O’Neil. I’d like to meet him; -he must be a corker.” The sentry had grounded his rifle and now stood -at ease talking sociably, very much at home with the young midshipman. - -“He is here,” Phil replied. “If I may pass my party, I’ll call him.” - -“Certainly, captain, anything you say goes with me,” the sentry -returned enthusiastically. - -The carriage, followed by the band of a dozen natives, drove down the -street away from the city. Phil caught a wave of a hand from the window -as he turned and started for the gunboat and his bunk, for it was near -midnight. - -O’Neil had stopped to shake hands with the admiring sentry and he soon -overtook them. - -In silence they marched to the ship. So much had happened, crowded -into such a short space of time, that the lads wanted a chance to think. - -The next morning while Phil and Sydney were at breakfast on the small -quarter-deck of the “Mindinao” Captain Blynn crossed the gangway from -the dock. He walked to where the lads had risen from their chairs -to greet him. Refusing their offer of breakfast with an impatient -movement of his hand he sat down in the proffered seat held for him by -the attentive Chinese steward. Both lads saw in his grave face that -something unpleasant had happened to account for this early morning -visit. The army man did not keep them long in suspense, and had his say -with his usual directness. - -“Lieutenant Tillotson, the officer of the guard yesterday, is missing. -His bed shows that he did not sleep in it at all last night. I have -investigated the case as far as I have been able, and I find that no -one passed through the sentries except a closed carriage and a squad of -Filipinos. This sentry says that you and Mr. Monroe vouched for them. -Tillotson was last seen an hour before this time by a sentry at the -bridge whom he visited. As soon as I heard of the carriage episode I -cautioned the sentry to say nothing. I wanted to see you and clear up -that part before I investigated further.” - -Phil sat speechless in his seat while the judge-advocate general -talked on earnestly. Tillotson had disappeared! How could he have been -forcibly carried past the numerous guards stationed at every outlet of -the garrisoned city? He must surely still be within the town. - -“Do you suspect foul play?” Phil questioned. “Would the enemy have -the daring to make way with him inside the town? Why should he alone -be molested? And, besides, he carried his revolver, and could not be -struck down without being able to fire a warning shot.” - -“One sentry,” the captain replied quickly, “reported having heard -a shot from the part of town near the sea, but he said it was very -indistinct, and after all he was not sure.” - -Phil and Sydney exchanged glances and the captain looked up sharply, a -faint suspicion entering his thoughts. - -“What I’d like to know,” he added coldly, “is who was in that closed -carriage; the sentry says there were four people.” - -Phil flushed as he read the insinuation in the captain’s voice. - -“Juan Rodriguez, his daughter and a Filipino overseer by the name -of Lopez,” he answered promptly, but he lowered his eyes before the -direct, searching gaze of the judge-advocate general. The presence of -Colonel Martinez need not be told. It would but complicate the case and -not aid in the search for Tillotson; but the army officer knew human -nature too accurately, and Phil was too poor a hand at telling less -than the truth. - -“There was besides a Filipino with the driver?” he questioned pointedly. - -Phil shook his head in the negative. - -“Was this Lopez within the carriage with Señor Rodriguez and his -daughter?” the captain asked curtly, and Phil felt as if he were on the -witness stand having the whole truth dragged from him. He might just as -well make a clean breast of it. Before those piercing black eyes, he -found that he was not good at dissembling. - -“Lopez was driving,” Phil said blushing furiously in mortification at -being so easily tripped in his testimony. “The other occupant of the -carriage was Colonel Martinez!” - -If a bombshell had exploded at Captain Blynn’s feet he could not have -appeared more astounded. - -“And you passed this insurgent officer out of our lines?” he asked -incredulously. - -Phil nodded, his throat dry and his mind stunned with a sudden fear. - -“This is certainly a queer proceeding!” the army man exclaimed. “I -cannot fathom it. Do you realize what you have done? Can you not see -that Lieutenant Tillotson’s disappearance will be laid at your door? -But surely,” he added, “there is some explanation which you can make? -You could hardly be so foolish as to plot against the life or even the -liberty of a brother officer.” - -Phil gave a sudden exclamation of surprised indignation, and with -flashing eyes he turned angrily on his accuser. - -“I didn’t see your meaning at first,” he said in a low, intense voice -but one that carried distinctly over the ship. “How dare you to -insinuate this to my face and on board my ship?--Captain Blynn, there’s -the gangway!” he cried sternly, his face now deathly pale but his jaw -set firmly. - -Captain Blynn rose hurriedly from his chair, his dark face swollen -with passion; his black eyes flashed, while his strong hands clutched -his chair nervously. He was about to speak, but Phil cut him short, -pointing his finger toward the exit to the deck. - -“I hope, Captain Blynn,” he said quietly though his lips were -trembling, “that you will see the uselessness of further talk and will -go ashore as I have bid you.” - -“You confounded little whipper-snapper!” the captain exploded -wrathfully. The stern judge-advocate was unused to such treatment; he -had always bullied those under him and in a measure by the very force -of his will, many of those senior to him in rank. But angry as he was -he realized that the midshipman was quite within his rights. He was on -board his own ship, and there he was supreme. - -“Captain Blynn, I hope it will not be necessary for me to have you -escorted across the gangway,” Phil reiterated, his voice showing -perfect control of temper. The lad glanced forward meaningly to where -many of the crew had collected, intently listening to the heated -colloquy between their young captain and this big, blustering army -officer. - -Then a voice from the dock made both the combatants turn suddenly and -gaze in surprise at the general, who, unobserved, had stopped abreast -them and had been an amused spectator of the discomfiture of his -judge-advocate. - -“I’ll tear up that telegram as soon as I get to the office,” he -exclaimed chuckling gleefully; “and, Blynn, you’d better come ashore -here before Captain Perry pitches you over the gangway.” - -Captain Blynn had but one great fault and that was his inability to -consider that anything mattered outside of his beloved work. Ruthlessly -he would trample over those in the way of success. Once he was on the -trail of a wrong-doer, he would follow it fearlessly until the culprit -was behind bars. - -Doubtless if Captain Blynn had stopped for just a moment and considered -the young officer before him, he would not have cut him to the quick -by an insinuation so cruel. To do the brusque captain justice, he -had regretted his words immediately he had spoken and seen the look -of injured innocence and anger in Phil’s face, but the masterful way -in which Phil had turned the tables on him was too much for the army -man’s temper and hence the invective. In his heart he did not really -believe that Phil was guilty of plotting against Tillotson. Without -the interruption from the dock he might even have apologized to the -spirited young navy man, but the general’s words injected a salutary -humor into this dramatic situation and made him see how untenable and -cruel was the attitude he had assumed. His face softened and an apology -of a smile struggled for place on his sun-tanned countenance. “You’re -dead game, youngster,” he exclaimed impetuously. “I believe you’re on -the level, only you’re a bit too reticent; anyway, here’s my hand, and -from now on we’ll work together instead of at cross purposes.” He took -the surprised midshipman’s hand and shook it heartily. - -“Come up to the office at ten o’clock,” he added as he walked toward -the gangway, the smile having disappeared and the alert business -expression taking its place on his face. - -The midshipmen watched him cross the gangway and join the general, who -had been taking his usual morning exercise before going to his office, -and as the two walked along apparently deep in conversation an orderly -stopped them, handing a telegram to the general. The lads saw him open -it and read and then pass it to Captain Blynn. Both turned as if by -a mutual impulse and glanced toward the gunboat, then changing their -minds apparently, they again turned and walked briskly toward the -headquarters building. - -“Something in the telegram concerns us in some way,” exclaimed the -analytical Sydney. “I wonder what it said?” But Phil’s mind was too -much occupied in thinking of the chameleon character of his new friend -to give more than a passing thought to the contents of the telegram. - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -A TRAITOR UNMASKED - - -“How dared he accuse me of knowing about Tillotson’s disappearance?” -Phil exclaimed as he sought unsuccessfully a solution to the mystery. - -“I don’t believe he really suspected us,” Sydney replied deprecatingly, -“but it must have struck him as odd to say the least that you should -pass an insurgent officer through the guards. You didn’t tell him why -you did it or even give him any of the circumstances. I think it was -natural that he should act as he did.” - -“I didn’t realize,” Phil said half laughing, “how queer it must have -seemed to him. Well, I’m going up and make a clean breast of it. - -“Have you any suspicion as to the identity of the man I shot?” Phil -suddenly asked. - -“I thought at once of Espinosa,” Sydney answered, “but I’m not sure; -he talked in a voice that was not familiar, but that may have been -feigned. Think of it,” he exclaimed, “those masked men are all in the -employ of our government. They have taken the oath of allegiance and -yet they are plotting to massacre our soldiers.” - -“It seems queer,” Phil exclaimed in a puzzled voice, “that the meeting -and Tillotson’s disappearance should happen the same evening. Do you -suppose it was only a coincidence?” - -Sydney shook his head. - -“Let’s get Captain Blynn to unravel that,” he answered. “He’s not half -as clever as some believe, not to have discovered in six months what we -have in less than two days. But remember, we promised Señorita Maria to -say nothing of her share in the work.” - -An hour later the lads had laid their startling discoveries before the -judge-advocate. - -“How many of these men did you count?” he asked excitedly, after he -had listened with rising indignation to the account of the Katipunan -meeting and the accusation against Rodriguez. - -“About forty, I should say,” Phil answered. - -“I don’t understand,” the captain exclaimed aloud, “why Espinosa has -not told me of the existence of this society. Of course I knew it was -active elsewhere, but I had no idea they would dare plot against us -within our lines.” - -“Have you never suspected Espinosa?” Phil asked quietly. - -“Yes, once,” the captain answered, after a moment’s hesitation, “but -I found I was mistaken. He would not have led us against this fellow -Martinez if he had been a traitor. I have the note here which I took -from Espinosa that gives the information. It is in Visayan but I have -translated it.” He handed the scrap of paper to Phil, who read it and -passed it back. - - “Colonel Martinez and two hundred men encamp to-night at Barotoc Hill - near Banate en route to join Diocno.” - -Phil pondered over the words of the message. Then he remembered the -terrible personal attack of Espinosa against Martinez. Was this a clue -to his betrayal? Were Martinez and Espinosa personal enemies? - -“No,” the captain continued assuredly. “Espinosa has aided us in every -way. It was through him that we sent Captain Gordon to the north to -prevent more of these deserters from Aguinaldo’s army landing. He has -kept us well posted on the movements of our enemy.” - -“But still,” Phil insisted, “there have been no big fights and we’ve -lost a number of men cut up through surprise.” - -“That’s due in a great measure to the country and the inexperience of -our volunteer officers,” the captain explained readily. - -“Are you so sure of the honesty of Rodriguez?” he asked suddenly. “I -have heard it insinuated that he aspires to the leadership if Diocno -were removed.” - -Phil was about to cry out his assured belief that Rodriguez was -sincere, but with the words on his lips he hesitated. He had seen -Rodriguez but once, and to be convinced of his honesty after such a -short acquaintance would sound ridiculous. He saw that Maria’s part -would have to be told if Captain Blynn was to be convinced. - -“I have every reason to believe in his sincerity,” Phil said instead. -“I can understand Spanish and I heard the leader denounce him as a -traitor to the natives. Then I heard Rodriguez’s eloquent appeal to the -men against their two-faced dealings. He surely had the courage of his -convictions, for every hand there was against him.” - -“Yes, the general had him down here the other day,” the captain said, -“and he was impressed the same way. He’s a power among the lower -classes, although he has many enemies among the educated ones.” - -Captain Blynn had been holding a telegram in his hand while the above -conversation was taking place and now he passed it over in silence for -Phil to read. - - “Colonel Martinez is not the name of insurgent officer that left - Manila about the time of sailing of steamer ‘Negros.’ Our secret - service men are sure that he is the noted outlaw ‘Remundo.’” - -“So you see,” the captain said not unkindly, “you have twice allowed -this desperado to escape. - -“But now,” the captain continued, “what we’ve got to do is to break up -this secret society and find poor Tillotson if he is still alive. I can -hardly believe that they have been able to carry him away unless it was -by water. However, Espinosa should know of this. I will send for him to -come here at once.” - -The captain rang his bell and sent the orderly who answered for the -Filipino. - -The midshipmen sat silently waiting while the judge-advocate returned -to his interrupted office work. - -The orderly soon returned, reporting that Señor Espinosa was not at his -house, and that his servant reported that he had not been home since -the evening before. - -The midshipmen exchanged knowing glances. Was Espinosa then the leader -whom Phil had shot? - -“Come!” Captain Blynn exclaimed, starting up from his chair. He led the -lads down to his carriage at the door and motioned them to enter. Then -giving an address to the driver they went whirling through the narrow -streets. - -After a ten minutes’ drive the carriage stopped in front of a large -Filipino house. Without knocking the army man pushed open the door -intruding his great bulk into the room. - -A half dozen natives arose from the floor, sudden fear in their faces -as they saw the officers. - -“Señor Cardero,” the captain said in a quiet voice, “where has Señor -Espinosa gone?” - -“I do not know,” the native replied sullenly. - -The captain glared fiercely at the small brown man before him; then he -reached out a strong hand and caught the native fiercely by the neck, -shaking him as a dog would a rat. The little man turned a sickly color -and his teeth chattered, but the bullying American held him closely -while his eyes flashed angrily as he questioned him. “Tell me, where is -Señor Espinosa?” - -“He is hurt, señor commandante,” the native cried out finally in a -terrified voice after he had regained his breath. “It was an accident. -I do not now know where he is, but he is not in the city.” - -The midshipmen were overjoyed at this news. So Espinosa was -the Katipunan leader and spy. Phil glanced at the surprised -judge-advocate, a light of triumph in his eyes. - -“Captain Perry,” the captain ordered hurriedly, “you and Mr. Monroe -stay here and guard these rats; I am going to have every native of -prominence in the town arrested at once. Thanks to you, we have at last -found the leak.” - -Throwing the cringing native from him, he strode out of the door, and -the lads heard the rumble of his carriage wheels as he drove rapidly -away. - -After the captain’s menacing presence had been removed the half dozen -captive Filipinos showed signs of restlessness, and once or twice -Phil surprised a covert glance toward a dark corner of the large -living-room. Both lads felt the responsibility of their position. They -knew that they were outside of the line of sentries, almost beyond the -sound of firearms. It seemed to Phil that the captain was over-reckless -in coming with only themselves into the haunts of a probable enemy. -Both lads were armed, their revolvers were held ready in hand and -their prisoners knew full well that Americans were dangerous shots. - -The inside of the room was but dimly lighted by a single oil wick, -and the darkness became blacker toward that part of the house where -no windows had been cut. Phil had heard the captain give instructions -to his orderly as he left headquarters to have a guard follow the -carriage. But would the guard be sent here to aid them, or would -Captain Blynn send them elsewhere to make arrests? - -“Let’s get out of this trap,” Phil whispered anxiously to Sydney at his -side, his idea being to order the men at the point of his revolver to -pass out to the street. - -Suiting the action implied in his words, Phil opened the door leading -from the living-room. He saw by the aid of the additional light from -outside that the five men had cautiously and stealthily moved backward -toward the wall nearest them, and were apparently supporting their -weights upon it. Suddenly he felt a jar and read in the eyes of the -Filipino nearest him revenge battling with fear. Then the floor shook, -and grasping Sydney by the shoulder Phil threw himself bodily through -the open door as the floor of the building crashed down twenty feet -into the cellar below. The natives, he could see, were hung on the wall -like so many old coats, while through the bamboo floor on which he -and Sydney had just stood numberless bamboo spears bared their sharp, -venomous points. The lad shuddered as he realized the murderous trick -which had failed. If they had fallen with the floor, heavily weighted -as it was with stones at the side, and resting on supports, which -had been dislodged by a rope in the hands of one of the villains now -hanging on the wall of the room, they would at this moment be lying -pierced through and perhaps dying before the eyes of their cruel enemy. - -He raised his revolver and covered the nearest cringing native, a -terrible anger in his eyes. In another second he would have pulled -the trigger, but Sydney’s hand closed firmly over his wrist, forcing -his revolver upward and the ball sped harmlessly over the terrified -native’s head. - -“They are more valuable alive,” Sydney exclaimed to Phil’s angry cry -of protest. “Come, let’s get outside before more of this hinged floor -is loosened. We can better prevent their escape in that way.” - -Phil followed his companion down the bamboo stairs and into the -street, where a crowd of curious natives had gathered on hearing the -startling shot. The lads moved their weapons menacingly, not knowing -or trusting the temper of the crowd which backed away cringingly from -the Americans. A glance down the street brought a glad cry from the -midshipmen as they saw a squad of soldiers advancing from the direction -of headquarters. A loud voice in the Visayan tongue from the building -they had just left was answered by many excited voices in the gathered -crowd, and then several women advanced slowly, holding up their -hands in sign of peace, their bodies close together as if for mutual -protection. The lads scarcely noticed the approach of the women, so -occupied were they in watching the building in which were imprisoned -five of the traitors who had been biting the hand of the master -that fed them. A swift glance over his shoulder showed Phil that -the advancing women were scarce ten paces away from Sydney, who was -guarding one corner of the house, while he was some thirty feet away, -guarding the other three sides. The soldiers were not over a block away -and hastening toward him; he could hear the rattle of their gun slings, -and the thud of their heavy shoes on the hard road-bed. Then again as -he cast an uneasy glance at this line of women his heart froze within -him while his voice failed, for he had caught a fleeting glimpse of a -savage face peering over their shoulders. - -“Look out for yourself,” Phil cried, directing his revolver at the line -of women and firing blindly. In that second his disgust and wrath were -so great at the dastardly strategy under the guise of friendship that -he would not have felt a qualm of conscience if one of these unnatural -women had fallen before his bullet. - -The women halted, sudden fear on their faces, while from between them -dashed a half dozen savage natives armed with bolos. As they charged -on the surprised midshipmen they cried out lustily in their guttural -language the war-cry of the bolo-man who has received the charm of the -Anting-Anting which to his superstitious mind makes him invulnerable -against the Americans’ bullets. They came boldly on while Sydney jumped -backward quickly to Phil’s side and the two lads emptied the contents -of their revolvers into the mass of naked brown men flourishing their -keen blades above their heads in an endeavor to close with their hated -foe. The women had run screaming with terror back to the safety of the -crowd, taking refuge within the densely packed houses. - -With their revolvers empty and but three of their half dozen assailants -writhing in the road, the plucky midshipmen faced the onrush of the -fanatics. Converting their revolvers into clubs, they awaited what -seemed to them certain death. Their one hope for safety lay in running -away from the charging bolo-men and toward the soldiers now scarce two -hundred yards away, but turn their backs on an enemy they could not. - -Within ten feet of the midshipmen the fanatics suddenly stopped and a -fear crept into their superstitious faces. The next second, to the -lads’ astonishment, their sharp swords dropped from nerveless fingers, -and the three natives prostrated themselves in the dust of the road. - -The lads gazed in startled wonder, scarcely believing their eyes. - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -THE MIDSHIPMEN RECONNOITRE - - -The midshipmen were so utterly astonished at the actions of their -fanatical enemies that they could only gasp out their surprise in one -heartfelt word of relief. Then a familiar voice at their elbow awoke -them from their stupefied inactivity. It was in Visayan and they turned -to gaze into the impassive face of Rodriguez. - -“I have ordered them to escape,” he added in Spanish, casting a quick -glance toward the squad of soldiers. “Poor fellows, it would be a pity -to kill them, for they are but acting under orders.” - -The lads were too grateful to their rescuer for saving their lives to -make useless inquiries as to why his influence could be exerted over -the acts of their enemy. Phil’s first thought was for the men whom the -captain had left them to guard. - -“Surround this house,” he commanded, and the sergeant in charge gave a -short command and led the way himself to the rear of the large native -building. - -“It is too late, señor commandante,” Rodriguez said shaking his head; -“they have all escaped through the rear door and are by now safely -away.” - -The midshipmen ran quickly up the steps and gazed disappointedly into -the gloom beyond. The floor still lay at the bottom of the cellar, the -bamboo spears sticking half-way through, but the natives had gone. The -back door stood open and to the ground was a jump of twenty feet. They -had safely escaped while the lads were engaged defending themselves -against the attack of the bolo-men. - -“I am on my way to see General Wilson,” Rodriguez announced after a -search had failed to disclose any signs of the fugitives, “and offer my -services.” - -“Do you mean that you will fight with us against the insurgents?” Phil -asked in glad surprise. - -“Yes, from now on I shall aid the Americans to restore order in the -island of Kapay,” Rodriguez replied, pleased at the cordial reception -given him by the two midshipmen. - -Together the party made their way back to headquarters in search of -Captain Blynn. - -“It was providential that I happened along,” Rodriguez said after they -had passed through the sentries; “those bolo-men knew me and obeyed my -sign. I see,” he added smilingly, “that you are already arresting the -traitors.” - -“We were not very successful with Señor Cardero and his friends -yonder,” Sydney exclaimed ruefully, “but I suppose we should be -thankful to have gotten off so easily.” - -“Cardero is one of the craftiest of our outlaws,” Rodriguez returned. -“It is a marvel to me how he could have remained unmasked so long. Of -course,” he added, “I have known of this intrigue for some months, but -until they deliberately plotted against my life I could not betray -them.” - -“Have you discovered who is the Katipunan leader who tried to murder -you last night?” Sydney asked excitedly. - -“Yes,” Rodriguez replied. “You have doubtless guessed that he was -Espinosa. I know it now for sure. He has gone to Matiginao, where -there is a strong fort, and is in command of all the insurgent forces -there. The bullet only crippled him last night, and I hear he is -rapidly recovering. General Diocno was murdered last night in his bed -and no doubt I should have shared the same fate.” - -They were by this time at the headquarters building, and were glad to -find that Captain Blynn had returned. The midshipmen informed the army -man of their luckless adventure and stood in silence expecting to hear -his harsh rebuke for allowing such important prisoners to escape, but -he only grasped their hands and congratulated them upon their rare good -fortune. - -“By George,” he exclaimed excitedly, “we’ve been contentedly living -over an active volcano. It’s a marvel we haven’t all been massacred -long ago. - -“Every native of any consequence in the town has departed,” he added -sadly. - -“Rodriguez with you, and wishes to aid us?” he cried gladly, as Phil -told of the intention of the wealthy native. “Well, that certainly is -cheering news.” - -Rodriguez came into the office and stood with dignified bearing before -the big judge-advocate. - -“So you are tired of being neutral?” the army officer said pointedly in -Spanish. “Do you wish to occupy the position just vacated by our mutual -friend Espinosa?” - -Rodriguez drew himself up proudly while the midshipmen gasped at this -harsh arraignment. - -“I do not blame you, señor,” the native answered, no evidence of -anger on his placid face. “I know that you can have but little reason -to trust the honesty of the men of my race. But I do not desire a -position. I am now ready to take the field with my men, heretofore -neutral. I have three hundred rifles.” - -“You are ready then to take the oath of allegiance?” Captain Blynn -asked in official tones. - -“Yes, señor, and keep it,” Rodriguez returned, his eyes unflinching. - -“Have you any news that will lead to our knowing the whereabouts of -Lieutenant Tillotson?” Blynn asked. - -“Ah, I have,” the native answered eagerly. “I was about to ask you--my -spies report a captive with Espinosa.” - -The Americans gave sighs of relief. At least Tillotson was alive. - -General Wilson received Señor Rodriguez with marked courtesy and -appointed him on the spot a colonel in command of his own men whom he -offered to enlist as native troops, rationing and feeding them from -army funds, but Rodriguez declined the latter, agreeing to defray all -expenses. - -The midshipmen insisted that their new ally should go down to the dock -and inspect the gunboat, so after explaining to General Wilson that -they would like to be absent for a few days on reconnaissance work, the -three strolled leisurely down the street. - -“Where is Colonel Martinez?” Phil asked after they had arrived on board -and the Chinese servant had brought refreshments. - -Rodriguez shrugged his shoulders and pointed toward the interior of the -island. - -“Will he serve under Espinosa as leader?” Sydney asked incredulously. - -“Who knows?” Rodriguez answered evasively. - -The lads saw that their friend had reasons for being non-committal and -tactfully ceased their interrogation, yet inwardly they were consumed -with curiosity. Espinosa had attempted to kill Colonel Martinez on the -morning of Blynn’s attack, and now would they serve amicably side by -side against a common enemy? - -The hour for lunch arrived, and as Rodriguez was not leaving for -several hours to return to his home up the river he gladly accepted the -midshipmen’s pressing invitation to eat with them. - -Phil had made up his mind to explore the river, though this idea was -unformed in his mind when he left headquarters. - -During the meal the midshipmen questioned their guest about Espinosa’s -impregnable stronghold and of its approach by water. - -“There is a trail from my ranch to the foot of the mountain,” Rodriguez -replied thoughtfully, “but it will be filled with traps, and will be -dangerous if Espinosa hears an attack is to be attempted. The river -flows through a narrow gorge at Matiginao, and from the cliffs huge -boulders can be dropped into the river many hundred feet below. - -“The gunboat!” he exclaimed in amazement, after Phil had questioned -in regard to the depth of water. “If it were possible!” Rodriguez -glanced admiringly at the heavy cannon mounted near him. “Yes, with -this gunboat in the river the tops of the cliffs could be swept, and -soldiers could scale the difficult trail unopposed, and once through -the narrows the trail leading from the stronghold could be commanded by -the cannon to cut off the retreat of the insurgents. It is wonderful! -But the bridge, Señor Perry,” he ended, his voice betraying his sudden -disappointment; “it is strongly built and a gunboat cannot pass.” - -“If I find there’s water enough to float the ‘Mindinao,’” Phil replied -assuredly, “the bridge will not stand in the way long. - -“Does your daughter know the country?” Phil asked earnestly. - -Rodriguez gazed a full minute at his questioner before he answered. - -“Every foot of it,” he added; “she was born near the stronghold. But -what is your intention, señor? This is no work for a woman.” - -Phil would willingly have bitten off his tongue for having led him -into such an embarrassing situation. He could not tell Rodriguez that -he wanted Maria because she alone would he trust as a guide on the -perilous mission which he had made up his mind to make. - -Major Marble fortunately arrived at this moment and saved the lad from -becoming more deeply involved. He gave them the latest news. - -“Tillotson’s father is keeping the wires hot,” he told them. “We are -ordered to spare nothing to recapture him, but of course we shall do -that anyway. The general has wired back the good news the señor has -brought, that Tillotson is believed to be a prisoner and alive.” - -Before the party dispersed, Phil confided to his hearers his plan to -explore the river and his intention to start that very night. - -“Then you will visit me on my ranch?” Rodriguez exclaimed gladly. -“Everything I have is at your service,” he added with the grandiloquent -air of a Spanish gentleman. - -Phil nodded gratefully, realizing that unlike the Spaniard, whose form -of address the native copied, Rodriguez made no empty offer. - -“I believe,” the lad continued, a spark of enthusiasm in his voice, -“that a gunboat of the tonnage of this vessel is capable of reaching -the insurgent stronghold.” - -“If you can accomplish that,” Major Marble exclaimed excitedly, “you -and your ‘Mindinao’ will make an enviable name for yourselves, for once -that stronghold is taken we shall have many surrenders throughout the -island.” - -“Why not force the insurgents to concentrate on Matiginao,” Phil asked -earnestly, “and attack them there?” - -“The general has already sent out orders,” Major Marble told them, -smiling at the lad’s eagerness, “to attack the insurgents wherever -they can be located and for all the troops to concentrate on Palilo, -leaving small garrisons in the towns to guard the peaceful natives. He -is working up a big plan to attack this stronghold with a large force, -and will undoubtedly take the field in person. He is determined to -rescue Tillotson, and will give Espinosa no rest until he is captured -or killed.” - -The midshipmen listened in delight to this plan, which fitted in so -well with their own ideas. - -The major soon departed, promising short work in destroying the bridge -if the lads discovered the river to be navigable above the house of -Rodriguez. - -O’Neil was ordered to have a boat’s crew of four men ready to leave the -gunboat at one o’clock at night. The distance to Rodriguez’s ranch was -somewhat over fifteen miles and the lads did not desire to be seen, so -they would pass at night and be safely within friendly land by sunrise. -Rodriguez left them soon after to return by land and promised a hearty -welcome on their arrival up the river. - -Promptly at one o’clock the expedition started. O’Neil had provided the -usual gear for surveyors; a compass, a lead line, and also a rifle for -each man and a revolver for himself. - -Silently they shoved off and rowed with muffled oars up the river, and -under the bridge, built substantially in the days of the Spaniards. “A -few charges of dynamite would settle it,” Phil thought. - -Already O’Neil had uncoiled his lead line and was sounding in the -channel of the river. - -“It’ll be a cinch, sir,” the boatswain’s mate exclaimed after several -soundings had given him no less than four fathoms of water. “Seven feet -is all we need and we can carry that for miles until the mountains -commence to go up steep; then there’ll be rocks to look out for.” - -Mile after mile was pulled in silence except for the light dip of the -oars and the dull, almost soundless splash of the lead as it was heaved -a short distance forward of the boat. - -The midshipmen gazed with apprehension at the forbidding banks of the -river. The rank tropical foliage would conceal an army. Riflemen might -lie concealed and fire without the slightest fear of discovery. - -Gradually the river narrowed, but the depth of water did not grow less. - -It was just before dawn when the boat arrived at the bend behind -which, by the description given them, would be the landing pier of the -Rodriguez ranch. - -In a half hour the boat was being cared for by one of the many willing -attendants and the sailors were escorted to the palatial residence of -Señor Rodriguez. - -It was the señorita who came first to meet her old friends. - -“Now we are fighting together,” she exclaimed gladly, “and I would like -to go out as a man and help.” - -Phil thought that nothing so far had deterred her. She had seen as much -fighting as most men and had withstood it bravely, and he said so to -her. - -“You might be valuable, señorita, to put courage in men’s hearts,” -Sydney added smiling, “but you would not be very formidable as a -soldier.” - -Maria bit her lips vexedly. - -“I can shoot as well as a man,” she cried half angrily, “and I can ride -a horse and paddle a canoe. What more is needed?” - -“Something which is not in your makeup,” Phil answered admiringly. “You -are not vindictive and are not cruel. But you can do us a favor, if you -will. We want to explore the country between here and Matiginao.” - -Maria clapped her hands with joy. - -“I know every foot of the country,” she cried eagerly. “You couldn’t -have better guides than my little brother and I. But,” she added, her -voice becoming lower and a fear in her eyes, “my father is now an enemy -to the ladrones and insurgents, and it is unsafe to wander away on the -lonely trails.” - -Phil and Sydney exchanged glances as much as to say, “There is your -woman’s argument. One moment she wants to fight and the next she speaks -of danger.” - -Señor Rodriguez welcomed the midshipmen, and together all sat down to a -large table where a delicious breakfast was served. - -Phil saw his men were provided for, as he intended leaving them behind, -and after breakfast Maria led the party out where five finely bred -horses were held by native grooms. - -Maria and Juan, who sat his pony as gracefully as if he were a part of -the animal, led the way across the open fields surrounding the ranch -houses. Then they plunged into a path cleaving the giant trees of the -tropical jungle. Limbs of trees brushed their faces and great care was -necessary to prevent themselves from being unhorsed. - -Phil’s idea was for the boat to wait until dark, and then row up the -river as far as possible and return by morning, in order that the -general could be informed of the feasibility of the plan and the work -of destroying the bridge started. His party, meanwhile, were bent -on following this trail toward Matiginao, to reach the ranch before -the boat and wait for it. He realized that they were running a great -risk, but he believed the necessity for the information was worth the -risk run. The trail led mostly within sight of the snake-like river. -They passed many dwellings, most of them deserted of all save hungry -mongrels and starving pigs. - -“This seems to be a fine trail,” Sydney said surprisedly, as they -walked their horses two abreast. - -“It leads but five miles further,” Maria replied, “and from where it -ends, all other trails are those made by animals, and followed seldom -by men.” - -At a brisk trot Maria started ahead. The jungle bent away from the -road, leaving a high arched canopy over the heads of the travelers, -through which the tropical sun shone with sullen impotence. - -“There is a small bungalow up here,” the girl announced in pleasurable -anticipation. “We shall have our lunch there. Before the big house was -built we lived there.” - -“How long has it been since you were there?” Sydney asked in sudden -anxiety, the fear entering his mind that it might now have other -occupants. - -“Not for years, señor,” the girl replied in a low voice. “It is very -lonesome, besides there are many pulijanes[3] in the mountains.” - -The house soon appeared through the thick grove of cocoanut palms with -its unkept lawn sloping gently to the river. The grass in front of the -house was overhead high, and everything had grown wild and in luxuriant -profusion. The house itself was in ruins. - -While Maria and little Juan had taken charge of the horses and tethered -them amid a good repast of alfalfa, the two lads strolled down to the -river. - -“Hello, here are some canoes!” Phil exclaimed; “and they’ve been -tied here recently,” he added anxiously, as he saw clearly the fresh -footprints and the grass trodden down near the landing. - -[Illustration: “_HELLO, HERE ARE SOME CANOES_!”] - -The lads’ intention had been to investigate the depth of the water in -the river, but their startling discovery made them forget all else -save the visible evidence that a small body of men had recently landed -at this very spot and had taken the almost obliterated trail to the -abandoned house. Maria and her brother might even now be prisoners -among their enemy. The two midshipmen gazed at each other through eyes -wide with apprehension. What was to be done? - -“We can’t desert the girl,” Sydney declared, gazing at the trodden -grass. “Otherwise we might reach the horses and escape before they -discover us.” - -“Come,” Phil exclaimed, “there are not many of them, and maybe,” he -added reassuringly, “they are not all armed.” - -The two lads walked noiselessly toward the house along the dim trail. - -The building was now in plain sight. The wide porch with its profusion -of clinging vines was deserted. The long flight of bamboo steps was -half in ruins. To the right not a hundred yards distant their horses -were standing, their noses deep in the rich grass. - -At the foot of the steps the midshipmen halted. There was a mysterious -silence in the air about them and they imagined that from the deserted -building unfriendly eyes were peering down upon them. - -Phil gave a sigh of relief as he saw Maria, leading little Juan, come -slowly through the tall grass toward them from the neighborhood of the -horses. He made up his mind quickly. Nothing further could be gained -here, and the evidence that others had been on this spot very recently -was too strong not to take the warning. He caught Sydney’s arm and -wheeled him away from the house. The lads had not taken a half dozen -steps before a shrill cry from Maria riveted them in their tracks. Over -their shoulders they saw that now the porch was filled with natives who -were pointing their rifles at them menacingly. - -“Come on, we might as well face them,” Phil whispered, his teeth -tightly clenched and with his hand on his pistol. - -Turning, Phil led the way back to the steps, and there he halted, -glancing inquiringly at the unfriendly guns covering him. - -A native, apparently an officer, dressed in a dull gray cotton uniform, -walked slowly toward him down the rickety steps. - -“How dare you insult me and my friends on my own door-step?” Maria’s -voice was high pitched in anger. “These gentlemen are my guests. By -what right are you here?” - -The Filipino officer had stopped half-way on the steps in surprise, -his revolver held in front of him. Unconsciously he dropped its muzzle -toward the ground and regarded the girl in unfeigned admiration. - -“Pardon, señorita,” he said apologetically, using the Spanish of the -higher classes of Filipinos. “You, then, are Señorita Rodriguez, and -I ask your forgiveness for my rudeness. I thought these señores,” -indicating the two midshipmen with a nod of his head, “were Americans -and my enemies.” - -Phil’s ears were startled by a loud peal of laughter, and he gazed in -almost horror at the girl, believing that she had become hysterical. -But a glance at her smiling face showed that her nerves were well in -hand. An angry flush suffused his face as it crossed his mind that this -was a trap of her own laying. But he blamed himself instantly for even -entertaining such a thought. What would she say? She must acknowledge -that he and Sydney were Americans, naval officers, though they were not -in uniform, having on khaki riding suits. Phil’s hand slowly drew out -his revolver from its holster, while his eyes were turned now on the -averted face of the native officer. - -“From what part of the island have you come?” Maria asked quickly, the -smile of superiority still on her face and Phil saw that to the native -the smile was disconcerting. - -“I am just from Matiginao,” he replied. “I came for fresh meat. To -forage on your father’s land.” - -The smile died on Maria’s face, but luckily the native had withdrawn -his eyes and was regarding closely the young men before him. - -Maria felt that the Filipino officer must know of her father’s enmity -to his new leader, Espinosa. Then as the native’s eyes again traveled -to her face the smile reappeared. - -“I see all white men are to you Americans. These señores are my guests. -I vouch for them,” she told him in a confiding voice. “It was a natural -mistake for you to make, Señor----” she stopped questioningly, and he -supplied the name. “Salas, colonel in the Filipino army, señorita, at -your service,” he said bowing gallantly. - -Maria had not guessed at the officer’s identity although she knew most -of the important leaders, having known them as a girl at her father’s -house before the war had begun. Now the mention of his name almost made -her heart stop beating. This frail creature, with the face and figure -of a boy, was feared by all who had fallen under his control. He had -won the unenviable reputation of being the most cruel of the insurgent -leaders, first in Luzon under Aguinaldo and then on the island of -Kapay. He was scarcely older than Phil, and yet he held the rank of -colonel. - -“Your name, señor,” she smiled, “is one well known throughout Kapay. -In appearance you are not the ogre that you are painted.” - -Colonel Salas’ white, even teeth gleamed between his thin lips. He -felt himself the master of the situation. Here was the proud daughter -of Rodriguez complimenting him. His small soul was nourished by the -thought that he was feared by all. - -“Then, señorita,” he said, “if you do not consider me an ogre, will you -and your English friends accept the offer of a share in my frugal meal? -It is now ready inside.” - -The midshipmen had watched with beating hearts this plucky girl’s brave -fence with the subtle native and as he pronounced the word English he -glanced at the silent lads. Phil thought he saw a gleam of joy in his -cruel eyes. - -“They do not speak Spanish?” he asked, shrugging his shoulder -expressively as much as to answer the question himself in the negative. -It was better so; one could play the game better than two and the lads -now knew that Maria was an adept in diplomacy, and could be depended -upon to make a better and intelligent fight for their lives. That -their lives were in danger was but too evident to the lads. The native -soldiers still covered them with their rifles, and Colonel Salas had -moved to Maria’s side as they had talked, leaving the line of fire -quite clear. A word from him and a score of bullets would be tearing -through their bodies. Did the officer believe that they were English? -Had he already seen through the deception, and made up his mind to -maneuver so as to kill them at the least risk to himself and men? Phil -gauged the distance between himself and the insolent face of this young -colonel and resolved that the word of command to his men to fire should -be a dear one for the smiling colonel. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -UNWELCOME COMPANIONS - - -The lads indeed found themselves in an awkward predicament. Just the -faintest thread really bound them to life, for they saw in the cruel -expression in the eyes of the Filipino officer that nothing would -delight him so much as to have these white men shot. Phil very much -feared that in spite of his cordial words this boyish native had before -now guessed the truth. However there was nothing to do but remain -silent and inactive. Phil had a great desire to speak to Sydney in -English, but he feared this dapper little Filipino might have learned -enough of that language to understand what he might say. - -With his cold eye on the midshipmen the native officer gave a gruff -command to his men behind him on the porch. Phil’s hand moved a hair’s -breadth, and the revolver muzzle on his hip pointed squarely at the -body of Colonel Salas, while his finger pressed ever so slightly the -trigger. For the fraction of a second their eyes met. Then the lad saw -with relief that the soldiers had lowered their guns and were filing -through the door into the house. With a deft motion he allowed his -revolver to slip noiselessly back into its holster. - -Colonel Salas had already turned and was leading the way up the steps, -Maria and her brother following, and the midshipmen bringing up the -rear. - -“Do you think he suspects us?” Sydney whispered. - -“He must,” Phil answered hurriedly. “Be careful, Syd,” he added -anxiously. “We’ve got to fight our way out. There seems no other way. -There are twenty of them against us two.” - -At the top of the steps Salas turned and looked questioningly at the -midshipmen. Phil dared not meet his eye for fear that the little native -would see the anxiety which he strove to hide. - -On the floor of the big room a cloth had been spread and a repast set -out. - -With a graceful wave of his thin hands Colonel Salas made a sign for -all to be seated and took, himself, the place beside Maria. Phil sat -on the other side of Maria, while Sydney and little Juan were placed -opposite. - -Their brisk ride had given them all an appetite, but the terrible -predicament in which they now found themselves had quite taken away -their relish for food. The lads did their best to appear undisturbed, -but any one with half an eye could have seen the restlessness behind -their forced tranquillity. - -It is not the Filipino custom to talk while eating, and it was not -until his dish was emptied that Colonel Salas broke the awkward silence. - -“Your English friends are very fond of adventure,” he said suddenly. -“Our camp is only a league up the river, and would be well worth a -visit. I did not intend to return so soon, but I shall be glad to take -you there. You can return to-day or remain until to-morrow morning. -It is the strongest fortified camp in the islands, and has never been -successfully attacked. You can see where three Spanish regiments were -annihilated by having rocks rolled down upon them.” - -Phil’s heart beat faster. Here was the very opportunity he had wished -for. If they could only see this camp with their own eyes; photograph -the surroundings in their minds; test the depth of the water and the -width of the channel, would it not be worth the fearful risk they -would run? Then the thought of Espinosa drove the possibility of such -a hazardous undertaking from his mind. They would then surely be -recognized even if they had not been already, and he shuddered to think -of the penalty. What was his astonishment when Maria agreed gladly to -the plan. - -“That would be fun, wouldn’t it?” she cried in English, appealing to -the utterly bewildered lads. - -“Bueno! We can ride to ‘El Salto de Diablo’ (the devil’s leap), and -there I shall have ‘bankas’ ready to take us to the foot of the trail,” -Salas returned delightedly as he left them to instruct his men sleeping -on the shady porch at the back of the house. - -“Do you realize what you are doing?” Phil muttered excitedly. “At any -moment he may discover who we really are. Suppose word should come -to him from the city? We must not accept his invitation,” he ended -hurriedly. - -“I fear,” Maria whispered, “that he already suspects who you are, and -for that reason I have accepted. If I refused we are already in his -hands, and what can we do against his twenty rifles? - -“We must act it out, and, if opportunity offers, escape. Above all, -don’t show by sign or word that you suspect him and don’t show how much -Spanish you know,” she ended fearfully, as she saw Salas approaching -with several of his men. - -Phil’s heart beat like a trip-hammer at this disquieting belief of -Maria. She was certainly keen. By what system of argument had she -arrived at such a conclusion? To Phil Salas had appeared to believe the -story told by the girl. Sydney and Juan had listened attentively to her -words. - -In a short time the party were in motion. A horse had been captured -from the herd of those that had run wild during the absence of their -owner, and Salas sat it well. Phil thought he had never seen such a -graceful horseman. The wild horse reared and plunged in its efforts to -unseat the rider, but he could not be disturbed. The native followers -formed about them, and the party moved slowly along the uneven road. - -After a half hour’s ride, Salas ordered a halt at the base of a bluff -several hundred feet high. The midshipmen gazed with inward emotion at -the towering cliffs ahead of them, through which ran like a torrent the -muddy Tubig River. - -“From here we must go by banka,” the outlaw explained. “My men will -go on foot, for they are accustomed to the rough trail; but for the -señorita it would be impossible.” - -One of the natives approached his chief timidly, and spoke a few short -sentences in a frightened voice. - -On hearing the man’s words, Salas’ face darkened in anger and he struck -him brutally with his heavy whip. The startled native recoiled in -terror from his incensed master. - -“He tells me that there is but one banka ready,” he explained -apologetically; “the other bankas are at the foot of the trail two -miles up the river. The ones we used this morning I left at the ranch. -I am sorry, but as only five can go in this boat some of the party -must walk. Who shall it be?” he asked abruptly. - -“There are just five of us,” Maria suggested enthusiastically. “My -brother and I are at home with a paddle and surely the señor colonel -has often propelled his own boat.” - -Salas glanced keenly at the girl’s face. He saw nothing there save -youthful eagerness for adventure. - -“As you wish,” he replied carelessly. “It’s a tedious journey: two -miles against the swift current. My men are used to it.” - -But Maria’s mind was set upon their going together. Phil pondered upon -what her plan might be. The river was now narrow and the colonel’s men -would always be within hail. - -“What shall we do with our horses?” Phil questioned. “Are we to return -here?” - -“I shall leave some men here with them,” the Filipino leader assured -him. “We shall either return by the way we came or else over the trail. - -“Vamos,” he concluded, waving his hand toward the large canoe which two -of the natives were holding close up to the steep river bank. - -Maria took her place in the bow while the others distributed themselves -evenly upon the frail low seats, grasping their paddles ready to -balance the boat when it was cast adrift in the swift current. - -Salas stood undecided upon the bank; his men had gone over the trail -leading through the almost impenetrable jungle between them and the -high palisade upon which was the outlaw’s stronghold. - -“Leave the horses here,” he said finally to his two men, “and go back -to the palm grove and bring up one of the canoes we left there this -morning.” - -Phil from his seat in the stern of the banka caught a significant look -flung to him out of the eyes of the girl who was seated in the bow, her -head bent gracefully backward regarding the Filipino leader. In the -rear of Maria was little Juan, his small hands grasping a paddle, much -too large for his strength. - -“Give the señor your paddle, Juan,” the girl ordered, then turning -to Salas she added persuasively, “Sit behind Juan, señor. I’m afraid -he might fall overboard and I don’t know what my father would do if -anything should happen to him.” - -The outlaw smiled and took the empty seat, taking from the boy’s -unwilling hands the large paddle. - -“Bueno,” he exclaimed, while the two men released the boat, pushing it -gently away out into the stream. - -Under the strong strokes of four paddles, for the midshipmen were both -expert, having owned canoes at the Naval Academy, the native boat swept -swiftly through the water. To avoid the strength of the current the -canoe was steered close in to the steep bank under the protecting shade -of the overhanging trees. Great crocodiles basking on the muddy banks -were passed, the animals slinking away as the boat approached, their -long tails lashing furiously in their haste. Monkeys filled the trees, -whistling and jabbering fearlessly as the boat passed under them. - -While Phil exerted himself manfully at his paddle, his thoughts busily -sought a plan to escape the enforced hospitality of Salas. A great fear -filled his mind as he dwelt upon the horrors of imprisonment among -these lawless men. To Sydney and him it would eventually mean death, -and to Maria and her little brother a long and dangerous imprisonment -and harsh treatment. But why had not Salas made them prisoners at once -if he suspected their real identity? Phil did not guess that the outlaw -had read defiance and action in the midshipmen’s eyes, and alert as the -outlaw’s faculties had become to scent danger even though carefully -concealed, he had detected the stealthy motion of Phil’s hand when he -had been confronted by his men. Salas was not a coward, but he had -realized instantly that if he ordered his men to open fire, unless the -first shots killed the Americans, he himself would fall the victim of -their vengeance. So he was biding the time when he would have them safe -without danger to himself. - -The boat had now covered nearly half the distance. Phil wondered what -he could do. The slight figure of the outlaw, seated upon the low -thwart just in front of him, was so temptingly close and apparently -so unconscious of any threatening danger. The native’s revolver lay -in its holster just within reach of the lad’s hand, the flap securely -buttoned upon its polished handle. Phil realized that when Salas -expected treachery his first act would be to capsize the canoe. Being -a strong swimmer the native doubtless believed he could reach the -bank first and have at his mercy those still struggling in the water. -To attempt to unbutton the flap of the holster and take the revolver -without the owner’s knowledge was impossible. Phil needed both of his -hands to wield the heavy paddle and if he stopped paddling Salas would -at once suspect treachery. His heart rose in his throat and his pulses -throbbed painfully as a bold plan flashed suddenly into his thoughts. -It seemed the one chance of escape. At the rate the boat was going it -would soon be at the foot of the trail to the stronghold where Salas’ -men would be waiting in force to escort them up the steep incline to -the top of the mountain. A huge crocodile lay asleep about a hundred -yards ahead and this sight had awakened the plan to action in Phil’s -mind. - -“Go slowly,” he whispered loud enough to be heard by all in the boat. -“Let’s see if we can’t get a shot at that big crocodile over there.” - -Salas slowly drew in his paddle, laying it across his knees, while his -hand went back to the holster strap. - -“You keep paddling slowly, Syd, and the señorita can prevent us from -capsizing when we fire,” the lad continued eagerly. His own revolver -still rested in its holster, while his eyes were bent upon the outlaw’s -hand fumbling with the buttoned flap. Mentally he measured the slight -figure before him and then the frail boat in which they were seated. -The terrible risk he was running came to him almost overpoweringly. -Overboard in this river full of hungry crocodiles was unnerving enough -to those who could swim, but Maria had said that her small brother -could not, and for him death in this swift current would be assured. -With his own paddle resting on his knees he braced his feet cautiously -but firmly on the round of the bilge so as to put an equal pressure -on each side. The outlaw, with his eyes on the crocodile as yet -undisturbed in his doze, had succeeded in releasing the flap; his thumb -and forefinger grasped lightly the revolver handle, drawing it slowly, -thoughtfully, from its cover. Phil’s hand was partly raised, as if he -held his revolver ready to shoot at the formidable animal. He muttered -a silent prayer that the crocodile would not awake before his plan had -succeeded. He felt that out of the corner of his eye the outlaw was -watching him, but Phil’s hope was that his act would be so swift and -unexpected that Salas would have no time to avoid it and jeopardize the -lives of those in the boat. - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -CLEVERLY OUTWITTED - - -As Salas’ hand slowly drew his revolver from its holster, Phil’s right -hand with the speed of a mongoos seizing its prey clutched the slender -wrist of the outlaw; the lad’s left hand had moved deftly to the slack -of the native’s strong khaki trousers, and the next second he had -raised the surprised Filipino from off his seat and held him for an -instant balanced in the air. - -“Turn her down-stream,” the midshipman ordered in a hoarse voice, as he -flung the struggling man into the water clear of the rocking boat. - -Maria by a well-timed stroke had instantly spun the canoe about, and -all four bent desperately to their paddles. Phil saw the broad-brimmed -sombrero of their enemy floating on the surface and a fear instantly -filled his thoughts that Salas might not swim. The next second he was -reassured; the head of the native covered with thick black hair could -be plainly seen swimming toward the far shore; the menacing presence of -the crocodile had deterred him from attempting to reach the land but -a few strokes away. Every second the lad expected to hear a loud call -for help from the outraged officer. Phil, over his shoulder, measured -the distance yet to be gained by the struggling native. Why had he not -cried out a warning to his men? Surely they were within hearing; the -trail over which they had gone must be but a short distance from the -river. - -Under the straining muscles of the midshipmen, helped by the swiftness -of the current, the canoe sped toward the grassy slope where their -horses were waiting. A bend in the river, and the swimmer disappeared -from sight. - -“Why hasn’t he given the alarm?” Phil demanded nervously. “What does it -mean?” - -“He will as soon as he reaches shore,” Maria gasped breathlessly. “The -monkeys when they fall in the water always scream, so Salas knows -better than to signal to all the crocodiles within hearing.” - -Little Juan, try as he would, could not keep up with the furious pace -set him by his companions, and he lay quietly balancing himself in the -boat and gazing about him with frightened eyes. - -The skiff was run full speed against the steep bank of the river, and -the midshipmen clutched eagerly the loose earth until Maria and her -brother had gained the shore. Then to their expectant ears there came a -loud halloo! from up the river. - -“There’s no time to be lost,” Phil urged excitedly as he darted ahead -to where their horses had been tied. A sickening fear took possession -of him until he had climbed to the top of the slope. - -“They’re here!” he cried joyfully, as he saw the five horses grazing -contentedly. - -The midshipmen lifted Maria and her brother upon the backs of their -horses, cutting loose the hempen lariats with which they had been -tethered. - -“Lead the way, señorita,” he cried hurriedly; “we must not spare -ourselves.” - -For one second Phil lingered. The fifth horse, if he left it there, -would afford the means of catching other horses to pursue them; for he -knew that a single outlaw would not dare attempt to follow. With a few -swift strokes of his knife he severed the bridle and then with his open -hand struck the restless animal across the flanks. As he swung himself -into his saddle he saw it plunge eagerly away into the dense jungle, -happy to be again free of its domestic yoke. - -As the lad dashed ahead after his companions, he heard the low moaning -note of the concha (a shell bugle), a signal of warning used by the -ladrones of the mountains. The sound was insidious. It seemed to come -from a long way off. Yet Phil knew the operator could not be a mile -away. The low tones were known to travel many miles, even farther than -the high notes of a bugle. To those whose ears had not been trained to -listen to the warning note, the sound might be mistaken for the coo -of a wood pigeon. The lad’s heart leaped as he foresaw that the two -men who had gone to bring the missing canoe were between them and the -only avenue of escape and their trained ears had already heard the -warning sound. If they had started back in the boat when they heard -the warning, they would remain concealed until the fugitives had drawn -within close range and then would open fire upon them. Even though the -persons of the party might escape the hastily aimed shots, the great -bulk of a horse could never escape and the crippling of one animal -would mean at the least their recapture, and probably death to all four. - -With the energy of despair he drove his horse forward to join those in -the lead. Breathlessly, trembling with his terrible anxiety, he reached -Maria’s side. - -“Do you know of any other road?” he gasped. “There!” he exclaimed -hopelessly, as a low coo came from the direction of the bungalow, “they -have answered.” - -“I know of a road,” the girl returned breathlessly, “but it is across -the river, and is very narrow and uneven.” - -Phil gazed frantically at the swift current as it appeared -intermittently through vistas in the trees while they sped along. Once -across undiscovered they would be safe. - -“But Juan, he cannot swim; he will be afraid,” he cried hoarsely. - -“Never fear for him. It was necessary Colonel Salas should think so -in order to persuade him to sit in front of you. He fell into my trap -very obligingly,” she returned, a half smile curving the corners of her -mouth. - -“The river then is our only chance,” Phil declared decidedly. “It will -be death for us all to attempt to pass the two armed outlaws.” - -“These horses are all good swimmers,” Maria answered hurriedly. “Just -hold on to the saddle and give them their heads. I know where we can -land, so follow me. Look out for Juan,” she ended in sisterly fear. - -As Maria, followed by the midshipmen and Juan, forced her horse to -enter the forbidding river, a fusillade of rifle-shots sounded from a -point in the river some thousand yards above them, and the smack of -bullets struck the water close to the horses’ forefeet. A new danger -now confronted the fugitives. Those above them had discovered their -intention to cross the river. Fortunately as yet they were beyond the -effective range of rifles, but if the two men at the ranch should -discover the move they were making to put the river between them and -their enemies, they could quickly cross in their canoe and locate -themselves in the path of escape. - -The horses drew back at first, erecting their ears and neighing -timidly, doubtless scenting the huge crocodiles hidden in the rank -growth upon the banks. - -Phil heaved a relieved sigh as he saw Maria’s horse emerge from the -water on the far side, and scramble up the steep bank, the dripping -girl clutching securely the saddle. - -Little Juan behaved like a veteran, guiding his horse with a gentle -hand across the current until the animal’s feet took the bottom on the -other side and when the horse’s back emerged, he was sitting again -securely in the saddle. - -Just as Phil, the last to reach the shore, gained the steep ascent, -a sharp crack of a rifle, followed by a loud smack as the bullet dug -itself into the muddy soil, announced that those at the ranch had also -discovered their presence. As Phil drew himself into the saddle shaking -free his reins, a single swift glance down the river showed him the -two natives running toward the palm grove where the canoe was tied. A -few swift strokes and they would again bar the way. - -“Come, Syd, we must ride ahead,” Phil cried in a fever of dread, as he -dashed by Maria and her brother. “Never mind what happens, señorita, -you ride on as fast as you can go,” he continued earnestly as Sydney -spurred ahead to join him. “We’ve got to turn those fellows back,” he -explained breathlessly. “If they succeed in getting across they will be -able to stop us completely.” - -As the midshipmen galloped madly down the rough trail toward a clearing -in the trees from which they could get a clear view of their enemy, -both drew their revolvers and held them in readiness. - -“Look out for your horse, Syd,” Phil continued; “he’ll probably balk -when we fire and to be unseated now would mean the end.” - -As the two horsemen came into view of the boat the two natives, -half-way across the river, suddenly dropped their paddles. Two flashes -of flame and a light, filmy smoke told that their bullets had been -sent speeding in the midshipmen’s direction. But fortunately the -rocking canoe had spoiled their aim. The missiles sang harmlessly above -the lads’ heads. - -On a mad gallop the two midshipmen rushed out upon the clearing, -revolvers in hand. As if on drill, the two horses were drawn back upon -their haunches and the Americans’ weapons spoke furiously--shot after -shot struck about the panic-stricken natives. They first attempted to -paddle away, but the close hiss of the bullets became more than their -waning courage could stand. Forgetting their rifles in their mad fear, -they jumped overboard and dived below the surface of the water, while -the empty canoe, in the grasp of the current, went sailing swiftly -down-stream, forever beyond their reach. - -With wild exultation the midshipmen turned and raced after their -fleeing friends. - -Darkness overtook them long before they could again recross the river -and take the wide trail on which it was possible to ride with greater -speed. - -It was after midnight before the great house of Señor Rodriguez loomed -up ahead, and after they had been stopped a number of times by the -vigilant sentries they gained the hospitable roof. - -After a hearty supper, which Maria insisted upon their eating, Phil -declared his wish to return to Palilo. - -“But your boat has not returned,” Maria insisted. “You must sleep here -to-night, then you can return in the morning.” - -Phil knew that O’Neil would not return until he had reached a depth of -water in the river too shallow for the gunboat to pass. How far would -he have to go? Maybe to the cañon beneath the insurgent stronghold. -In that case he could scarcely expect them before morning. A slight -uneasiness filled his thoughts, but he tried to put it aside, for -O’Neil’s ready resourcefulness could get them out of almost any -difficulty. - -“It is important, señorita,” Phil declared firmly, “that I should -return to-night. I will leave a message for my men to follow down on -their return. May I have a boat or a couple of horses?” he asked. - -Maria spoke a few words to an attendant. - -“Lopez will guide you,” she answered. “I am sorry you will not stay, -but you, of course, know best.” - -Señor Rodriguez, after he had been told of the miraculous escape of -the explorers, shook the lads warmly by the hand, and thanked them for -taking care of his two children. - -“It was the other way around,” Sydney cried in admiration. “Your -daughter really saved us and herself, too. If it had not been for her -we should have blundered into a fight with the ladrones and been killed -for our pains.” - -The old man shook his head thoughtfully. - -“Salas, eh? So he is with Espinosa. The two blackest rogues we have in -the islands. You are lucky to be free of them.” - -“How many men have you guarding your plantation?” Phil inquired, his -mind bent upon the possibility of an attack. - -“I have five hundred men, but only three hundred rifles,” Rodriguez -replied. “Captain Blynn will send sufficient guns to arm all the men -by to-morrow. I do not fear an attack until after Espinosa is more -recovered. My spies report that he is still suffering from his wound. -I suppose I must expect an attack eventually,” he added sadly, gazing -lovingly at his daughter and little son. - -Within the hour, Lopez appeared and reported all was ready for the trip -to Palilo. - -“If you want more men,” Phil suggested, “I can speak to Major Marble, -the adjutant-general. But I, myself, hope soon to be anchored off your -house in the ‘Mindinao.’” - -Lopez’s old eyes opened wide. “A gunboat has not been for many years up -this river,” he said gravely. “The Spaniards built the bridge after the -bloody fight at Matiginao over thirty years ago. It is said that many -rocks were placed in the channel by the natives at that time, and after -the Spaniards found the river was blocked for their gunboats they built -that bridge to endure. It is all of stone and iron. A steam-launch can -barely pass through the archway.” - -Phil’s heart sank. The channel blocked with rock! If this was true only -a careful survey could assure safety for the gunboat. The lead might -easily miss the shallow places while the gunboat would discover the -obstruction for the first time with its frail bottom. - -The lad shook hands with the dignified old man. They regarded him -almost with reverence. Had they not seen him stand bravely before a -score of his countrymen, who he knew would like nothing better than -to murder him, and tell them boldly that he was for the right even if -to be so would cause him to be called a traitor! Now he had declared -for the American cause and almost every influential native’s hand was -against him. - -Maria went with them to where the grooms held their horses. - -“Señorita, we can never thank you enough,” Phil declared gladly. “You -are forever putting us in your debt.” - -“Ah, you have forgotten the night you saved Colonel Martinez,” she said -softly, and Phil imagined in the moonlight that her eyes shone brighter. - -“By Jove, Phil!” Sydney exclaimed eagerly a moment later, after they -and Lopez had swung themselves into their saddles and were trotting -down the broad roadway, “I didn’t believe it was in any girl to have -such grit, least of all one of her race. How on earth did you come to -think of such a trick as you played on that dapper little colonel?” - -Phil smiled deliciously. - -“That was planned telepathically between the señorita and me,” he -replied. “She purposely sat in front of Salas and I was placed behind -him; reason one. She knew that I knew if Salas remained in that -canoe we would all be made prisoners, and as Espinosa would be our -jailer--well! The crocodile was sent by a kind Providence, but if not -one way it would have been another. The idea occurred to me and I -firmly believe that she divined what I was about to do, for did you see -her spin the canoe about so as to get out of the colonel’s reach when -he was sent floundering in the water? She first induced him against -his caution and better judgment to trust himself alone with us in one -canoe.” - -“But why didn’t he disarm us?” Sydney questioned perplexedly. - -“I dare say he wonders why he didn’t too, by now,” Phil laughed. “Maria -threw him quite off the scent, apparently. These brown fellows are -very keen on dramatic scenes, and he doubtless thought it would be a -fine situation to spring the fact that we were prisoners when we had -arrived in Espinosa’s presence.” - -The guide Lopez rode silently at their side. The lads were too much -occupied to give him more than a passing thought until the road emerged -from the woods of the valley and wound gradually around a hill which -was half-way between Rodriguez’s ranch and Palilo. Their conversation -had flagged; for the first time they realized that they needed sleep. -After their hard ride they felt tired and stiff. By mutual consent they -stopped on the crest of the hill. Phil took out his watch and held it -up to the moon’s rays. - -“Two o’clock!” he exclaimed. “Not much sleep for us to-night.” Then a -look in Lopez’s face caused him alarm. He saw the native, eyes intent -on the horizon from which they had come and his hands pressing forward -his ears, apparently trying to intercept a sound which he had either -heard or imagined. - -Phil was about to ask an eager question but before he could speak he -was answered by a distant rumble from the direction of the ranch. Again -and again the slight sound trembled on the still night. Like statues -silhouetted against the sky, for a second or more the three men sat -transfixed with apprehension. Then as one man they whirled their -horses about and galloped madly back over the road in the direction -from which they had come. That far-distant sound could have but one -interpretation;--the Rodriguez ranch was being attacked, and they might -be needed. - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -A NIGHT OF ALARM - - -After the midshipmen had ridden away Maria returned to the large -living-room to bid her father good-night. A new pleasure had come -into her life, and what was more natural than that she should wish to -share it with him? These frank, young Americans had proved themselves -to be of a quality which she had not thought existed outside of the -story-books of her childhood. She believed that in their friendship -her father’s difficulties would melt away. Juan Rodriguez, interested -as he had always been in the political trials of his country together -with the management of his vast estates, from which he had reaped great -riches, like most Filipinos of the upper class, had treated his only -daughter more as a heaven-sent treasure rather than as a daughter to -confide in and in whom to seek womanly sympathy in his perplexities. -Her principal care had been for her brother, Juan, the pride of the -old man’s life. Upon this seven-year-old boy the greater part of his -affection was centred. Maria was not at all sleepy, and, seeing a light -in her father’s bedroom, she slipped in quietly to pour out her heart -to the stern but kindly parent. - -On the threshold she stopped in startled amazement. Her slippered feet -had made no sound and the door as she pushed it open caused him to -glance up in annoyed surprise. She saw her father on his knees in the -corner before several heavy iron-bound chests, and their opened covers -displayed to her anxious eyes a great wealth of gold and silver coins. -More money than her young imagination had ever dreamed of. - -As Rodriguez’s eyes encountered the startled look in his daughter’s -face, an expression of stern annoyance came into his own as he snapped -the huge lids shut and rose to his feet. - -“Why do you keep all that money here?” she asked anxiously. - -Her father looked worried at the question. - -“All the money I have is in those chests, daughter,” he answered in a -low voice. “It has been buried, but when Garcia deserted me, Lopez -and I dug it up and brought it in here. I fear these native banks, and -if I should be robbed by the insurgents I would leave you and Juan -penniless. My lands are valuable, but these,” pointing to the chests, -“contain the most of my wealth. My ambition is to take my children -abroad, away from this turmoil and strife where they can see the world -and be educated in a way befitting the blood in their veins.” - -Maria put her arms about the old man’s neck and kissed him fondly. -“Father,” she began, her eyes smiling with happiness, “I came in to -speak to you of the two young men who have just left us. Tell them of -your troubles and I know they will be able to solve the difficulty.” - -Rodriguez smiled sadly. - -“Your knights, child, I see have already been endowed with magic -powers,” he answered lovingly, patting her smooth black hair, “but we -have a cruel and unscrupulous enemy against us, and I am sure by now -he knows of the existence of this treasure. Garcia and I were the only -ones who knew where it was buried, and I trusted him as a brother but -he has deserted and betrayed me. Lopez is from the people, but his -honesty and loyalty are beyond doubt. Captain Blynn knows that this -money is here and has promised to send a company of soldiers to take it -to safety in the government vaults at Palilo. I had hoped he would be -here before now,” he ended in a worried tone. - -“Why bury it?” Maria exclaimed. “Our American friends would gladly take -it on the gunboat, where it will be perfectly safe.” - -Rodriguez’s face lighted up. - -“I will ask them to-morrow,” she added as she kissed her father in -parting, “and now don’t lose any sleep over your troublesome gold.” She -turned, a happy smile on her face, and glided noiselessly to the door, -to enter her own room; she stopped and the smile froze on her face and -the fear within her made her faint; she clutched reeling at the door -and steadied herself. The face of a man had been pressed against the -dark glass of the window in her room, and she knew instantly that he -had seen through the opened door the three coveted chests of treasure. -She passed her hands across her face in horror, hoping that it was but -a trick of the imagination, conjured up by her anxiety. But no, the -face had been too vividly distinct. As she had entered the darkness -of her room, for an instant the light from her father’s lamp had been -reflected on the intruder’s face, and in that terrible moment she had -recognized her father’s former confidant, but now his enemy, Garcia. -She stood panic-stricken, at a loss how to act. To give the alarm might -insure her father’s death. Perhaps the enemy had made their way within -and were at that very moment concealed in the great vacant rooms, lying -hidden in the darkness waiting until the household were all asleep, -and then murder and robbery would be their aim. If she told her father -now, she knew that he would fearlessly and at once give the alarm and -call for his armed men to protect him. Then a thought made the blood -freeze in her veins, as her active mind sought for the means Garcia -had employed to pass her father’s sentries. There could be but one -solution. Garcia had sowed dissension among her father’s retainers. How -many of his men could now be trusted? While she stood in terrified -silence, a loud knock on the outside door caused her young body to -tremble in mortal terror. What could it mean? Who would come at this -hour in the morning? She saw her father make ready to answer, for the -servants all slept in a house adjoining. - -“I’ll open it,” she cried, trying to disguise the tremble in her voice, -and with shaking limbs she crept down the stairs. Holding her breath, -she listened. Then she drew back the bolts in trembling haste and threw -wide the door. - -O’Neil and his tired companions, the boat’s crew, stood in open-eyed -wonder as this wild-eyed but now joyous girl dragged them inside and -again barred the door. - -“What’s the trouble, señorita?” O’Neil asked in calm surprise. - -She put her finger to her lips and led them into the dining-room, where -the remnants of the midshipmen’s supper still remained. The five men -fell upon the food ravenously while Maria stood by, fear and hope in -turns showing in her dark eyes. - -She told them of the trip up the river and the escape from the ladrone -leader, then of the valuable treasure in her father’s room and the -face she had seen at the window. After she had finished she watched -O’Neil’s face as if it were an oracle and she a petitioner before it. -The boatswain’s mate ate for several minutes in silence. - -“Where are your men posted?” he asked suddenly. - -“They are divided into four companies, one at each of the outposts,” -she answered. - -“Does any one except your father and Colonel Martinez know of Garcia’s -treachery?” he asked. - -“Yes, two, Lopez and Lukban,” she replied, “and they are both away from -the ranch. Lopez has just gone to Palilo with our friends.” - -“That’s bad,” the sailor exclaimed, a cloud on his otherwise -expressionless face. “Then your men believe that Garcia is still their -friend? He has, of course, accomplices among them and his object surely -must be the treasure. He has discovered that it has been dug up, and -now knows it is in your father’s room. I do not believe there is any -immediate danger unless at the same time the insurgents are to make an -attack in force.” - -The girl listened eagerly, nodding her head in agreement with the -wise words of this cool and calm American. O’Neil’s companions, -understanding no Spanish, had finished their meal and were dozing -contentedly in their chairs. - -“Have you a servant you can trust?” O’Neil asked after a moment’s -thought. - -“My maid, Inez,” she answered. - -“All right; give her a revolver and tell her to go to each company and -quietly wake the men and tell them to get ready immediately to repel an -attack. If she is in danger of being captured by a lurking enemy tell -her to use the revolver. I’ll leave two men with you and your father, -while I’ll take two to try to bag this Garcia.” - -Maria listened eagerly, hope rising as the sailor clearly outlined his -plan of action. She was sure Inez could be depended upon. Quietly she -flew up the stairs. As she passed her father’s room she saw that he had -retired, but had left the light burning for her. She stopped a second, -listening to his easy breathing. He was asleep. Then she went through -her own room, a chill passing through her as her eyes turned in fear -toward the window. - -She took hold of Inez’s arm and shook her into wakefulness. The old -woman, who had nursed Maria as a baby, sat up rubbing the sleep out of -her eyes. - -“Keep quiet,” Maria whispered in a commanding voice. “We are all in -danger of being murdered. I want you to take this revolver and go to -each outpost, tell the officer on guard that it is Señor Rodriguez’s -order to form his men to repel an attack at once. If you fail fire the -revolver as a signal to us.” - -The old woman rose to her feet trembling violently. She counted her -beads, murmuring her prayers, but there was never a word of fear or -hesitancy. - -“Good, Inez,” Maria whispered, kissing the old wrinkled face. The girl -saw it was set determinedly, yet a great and unknown terror looked out -of her appealing eyes. But the girl knew that she would be the safest -messenger. No one else could be depended upon like Inez, and she would -sacrifice her old life willingly to help her beloved master. - -When Maria again entered the dining-room O’Neil had turned out the lamp -and was ready to carry out his daring plan. - -“Two of my men will remain here with you, señorita,” he told Maria as -she held open the door. “We’ll soon bag this fellow Garcia, if he’s -still hanging about.” - -O’Neil, followed cautiously by his two men, walked slowly about the -great house. As noiselessly as Indians they crept within its shadow, -straining their eyes toward the portico and covered porches above their -heads. There still remained the light in the room above where the girl -and her two protectors were doubtless now guarding her father and his -treasure. While O’Neil stood listening eagerly, a shadow crossed the -windows; it moved slowly inch by inch. The house was silent. Off to his -left O’Neil could hear a babble of excited voices and the rattle of -military accoutrements. Inez’s warning had been given and the native -soldiers were hastening to their stations to repel an enemy. The -shadow slowly crossed and disappeared and then the light was suddenly -extinguished. O’Neil was about to seek further when a noise from above -arrested his attention. He recognized at once that a sash was being -opened slowly. Then as he watched a dark figure appeared and dropped -noiselessly to the porch roof a few feet below the window. Quietly it -lowered itself to the edge of the roof and then with the agility of an -acrobat or a sailor climbed down the post near which the boatswain’s -mate and his men were standing. The next moment two powerful arms -enfolded it and a cry of fear was promptly stifled. - -Then from the dark shadow of the woods to the northward came a volley -of musketry, followed by the war-cry of the bolo-man. - -Hastily binding their prisoner with their neckerchiefs, the sailors -flung him on to the porch and rushed to join the defenders scarcely -four hundred yards away. Rodriguez had carefully laid out his plan of -defense, and before the attacking enemy could come to a hand to hand -fight, over three hundred yards of cleared land must be traversed. -As O’Neil and his men reached the trenches where the native soldiers -were excitedly firing blindly into the night, he could see a bobbing -line of men rapidly running across this open space, firing as they -advanced. Hastily surveying his surroundings, he saw that on one flank -was the river defended by a company of men and on the flank away from -the river was still another company. The excited native officers were -shouting orders to their men, the purport of which O’Neil could but -guess. The bobbing figures seemed in vast numbers and they advanced -rapidly in spite of the fire from the trenches. Suddenly the company -from the river bank left its post and came at double time to the middle -of the line of defense. O’Neil and his men had seized a rifle each -from lifeless hands and were elbow to elbow--vociferously haranguing -the men, cautioning them to aim at the constantly moving enemy. Before -they could realize its significance, a line of men arose suddenly from -the short grass, only a few score of yards in front of the trenches, -to which point they had crawled unobserved, while the defenders had -been firing at the visible enemy. The next second this avalanche of -naked humanity had cleared the intervening yards and were hacking at -the surprised defenders with their sharp bolos. Their friends in their -rear still kept up a brisk fire and many of the bolo-men suffered by -it. O’Neil suddenly found himself occupied by three fanatics bent upon -his destruction, while his companions near him were in as perilous -a position. Throwing away his empty rifle he drew his revolver and -fired unerringly at the nearest native. Then seizing the fallen man’s -bolo he rushed upon his other two assailants. So fierce had been the -onslaught of the bolo-men that they had surged into and even beyond the -rifle-pits, leaving a trail of destruction in their path. - -The bolo-men, now at close quarters with those in the trenches, made -good use of their keen-bladed knives, but Rodriguez’s men, familiar -with the method of attack of these fanatics, appeared to flee, and then -turning shot their would-be pursuers down by the score. O’Neil and his -companions were in these few exciting minutes many times in peril of -their lives but soon the last of the attacking horde lay gasping on the -grass behind the intrenchment and the sailors and their dusky allies -were again in comparative security awaiting grimly the final attack of -the bobbing figures some hundreds of yards in their front, from whose -direction a hail of bullets whistled incessantly. O’Neil felt himself -all over hardly believing that he had escaped unscathed. The sailor -during his many years of service had never seen a fight more desperate. -He had frequently heard of the insurgent method of employing bolo-men; -using their riflemen as a screen, the practically unarmed horde, who -believed that their “Anting-Anting” charms rendered them invulnerable, -crawling snake-like, unobserved beyond their firing line until they -reached the rifle-pits of their enemy. Now he felt sure the attack on -the ranch would fail. Rodriguez’s natives had successfully weathered -the bolo rush, which they had learned to fear most. He did not know the -numbers of the attackers, but if they could be held off until morning -the soldiers who had been promised from Palilo to guard Rodriguez’s -treasure would surely be there to turn the tide in their favor. By the -fire from the trenches surrounding the ranch house on all sides except -that covered by the river, beyond which was an impenetrable swamp, -he knew that their line had not been broken. With a lighter heart -he counseled the natives near him to be careful of their ammunition, -setting them an example by firing deliberately only when a target -native exposed himself in the clearing in front of them. So much -occupied were those in the trenches that they failed to see several -great canoes land near the pier, and their occupants in single file -noiselessly steal toward the ranch house. - -Again and again the insurgents made their onslaught, but each time were -received unflinchingly and driven back in confusion across the cleared -ground, many being left dead or dying on the field. - -A disheveled, terrified figure came running from the house toward the -trenches; it glanced about wildly seeking some one and then threw -itself at O’Neil’s feet, clasping his legs tightly, almost upsetting -him among the stiffening bodies of the dead on the floor of the trench. -In the dim light he recognized the woman Inez who had courageously -spread the alarm among the native soldiers and her incoherent words -filled the sailor’s heart with dire forebodings. - -“Oh, señor, save my master,” she cried; “he is in mortal danger.” - -O’Neil bent down and unclasped the woman’s hands and lifted her to her -feet, but her body crumpled and the American saw with a sob of horror -that Inez had done her last service to the Rodriguez family; a bolo -cut on her old body had claimed her among the victims slain in this -unnecessary war. - -The boatswain’s mate laid the woman’s body aside and with a score -of willing men started on a run for the house. Half-way there they -stopped precipitously, hardly believing their eyes, a great fear in -their hearts, for from the river there came a noiseless band of men, -dim shadows under the gloom of the trees. O’Neil counted them as their -silhouettes crossed a vista in the trees, and his hopes died within -him. Here was a new enemy, striking from the rear. The men in the -trenches could not leave their positions; to do so would allow many -hundreds of the insurgents to sweep the ranch. - -“Forward!” he cried; “we must reach the ranch house first.” - -He saw that this was their only hope to save the inmates. - -Then a cry of joy leaped from his lips as tongues of flame leaped from -the vicinity of the house, directed upon the advancing men from the -river. He heard an order given sharply in the English tongue and a -volley shattered the darkness asunder. - -“American soldiers!” he cried jubilantly. - -O’Neil and his men had meanwhile circled away from the river in hopes -of making a rush for an entrance; now with sudden consternation O’Neil -saw that the appearance of the soldiers from the river would place -him in the line of retreat of those now surrounding the ranch house. -Selecting the protection of a tree trunk he called upon his men to do -likewise. He heard the order “Charge” given in the silvery peals of a -bugle and the next moment the terrified natives were fleeing directly -toward him, the hindmost slashing with their bolos those in front of -them in their mad haste to seek safety. Then the drumming of hoof-beats -was heard and three horsemen appeared suddenly from the night, -emptying their revolvers as they came into the fleeing savages. - -A woman’s scream pierced the night and the figure of a man silently -dropped from the roof and disappeared in the darkness. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI - -A FILIPINO MARTYR - - -Phil and Sydney were hard pushed to keep up with the native as he -spurred his horse forward over the dark road. - -“The ranch is being attacked!” Lopez cried in a voice of fear. “My poor -master will surely be killed!” - -Phil’s thoughts were only for the frail girl whom he had begun to look -upon as his own especial charge. He knew the cruelty of the Filipinos -when once their anger was aroused and he believed that her part in -Espinosa’s betrayal must now be known to that treacherous leader. -Probably Colonel Salas himself formed a part of the attacking force, -and the lad thought fearfully of the vengeance he would take upon the -helpless girl if she fell into his hands. As they approached the ranch, -the volume of fire increased alarmingly. - -“They are in force!” Phil exclaimed, his heart sinking within him as -he urged his tired mount forward. - -The ranch with its surrounding orchard of fruit trees now lay just -below them and the white road winding down the hill glistened in the -dim moonlight. Tongues of flame darted here and there from the shadows -of trees and shrub, even close to the house itself, while further in -the background toward the river a line of flame resembling fireflies -on a summer evening told him the soldiers of Rodriguez were stubbornly -resisting the main attack from their solidly built trenches. As they -plunged madly down the hill road, his alert eyes tried to disentangle -the situation. He saw many moving figures flitting through the trees, -the moonlight glinting on their bright bladed bolos, while toward -the river a long line of flashing rifles told of a rescue party -approaching, from whom the flitting figures were fleeing. - -Three white figures appeared suddenly from behind a tree close to the -retreating bolo-men and the lad’s heart gave a great leap of joy as he -recognized even in the dim light the stalwart figure of O’Neil. - -Then as he charged forward with his companions close beside him, -Maria’s cry made his heart sink and at the same instant he saw -the figure of a man emerge from the house and dart away after the -retreating bolo-men. - -“Where are we needed?” a familiar voice shouted from the company which -had now halted at the house, and the anxious lads, after firing their -revolvers in vain at the fleeing figure, were shaking Captain Blynn’s -hand. - -“In the trenches, sir,” O’Neil volunteered eagerly. “They are hard -pushed, sir.” - -Captain Blynn gave a hurried order and his company of American soldiers -rushed eagerly toward the thick of the firing, followed by O’Neil and -his men. All were eager to again try conclusions with the elusive foe. - -Phil and Sydney followed the anxious Lopez to the house. As they -entered the hall they were horrified to find everything in confusion. -The furniture was wrecked in many places, and there were blood-stains -on floor and wall, showing there had been a terrible struggle. A light -was burning dimly in an alcove. In the corner lay the white form of -an American sailor mutilated and dead. Further up the stairs they saw -the other poor sailor breathing his last. Clearing the body with a -bound the lads gazed with sinking heart upon the dead face of Señor -Rodriguez, lying on the floor of his bedroom, while all about him was -confusion and ruin. - -“Where is the girl?” Sydney asked in a faint, fearful voice. - -“Señorita!” Phil called hopelessly. - -A faint sob came to their ears from an inner room. Rushing in they -found the girl on the floor, her hands and feet securely bound. About -her mouth a gag had been placed, but it had fallen, leaving the mouth -free. - -They quickly released her and placed her tenderly on the bed. - -“She managed to get off the gag and scream,” Phil whispered with -admiration, “before she fainted. Bring that light, Syd, she may be -hurt.” - -The light was soon brought, and the lads were relieved to find that she -was unharmed. - -Lopez meanwhile had stayed at the bedside of his dead master, moaning -piteously. The noise caught the girl’s ear as she awaked from her -stupor under the administration of the midshipmen. - -“It was Espinosa himself,” she exclaimed in an anguish of sorrow. -“They forced the door and killed the brave sailors. My father defended -himself but he is no match for five men. Espinosa struck him down from -behind. I ran to guard little Juan, but they caught me and bound me.” - -“The money is gone too,” groaned Lopez. This to him seemed as great a -sorrow as the death of his master. - -“They lowered it out the window,” Maria said. She entered her father’s -room, walking unsteadily between the two midshipmen, and knelt in -prayer before her father’s couch. - -Phil’s eyes fell before those of the girl as she arose dry-eyed and -calm. He saw the anguish in her face, however, and vowed that he would -lighten her task wherever it lay in his power. - -“Is Juan safe?” Lopez asked suddenly, his mind at last grasping the -horrible calamity which had fallen on his master’s house and realizing -that his first duty was with the living. - -The girl nodded. - -“Inez brought the alarm that the house was surrounded. She hid the -boy and herself. Espinosa searched for him and his intention was to -carry us both away as his prisoners.” Then a sudden fear came into her -voice and her eyes flashed with excited terror. “He said that Colonel -Martinez had been killed. Is it so?” - -The lads shook their heads. - -“We have no news, Maria,” Phil said kindly. “No, it cannot be so. It -was but prompted by this cruel man to taunt you.” - -She sighed hopefully. - -“If he had known of this attack and was alive he would have prevented -it,” she exclaimed suddenly, her hope turning to dejection. - -While they were talking the fusillade slowly diminished and soon ceased -altogether and in a short time Captain Blynn’s voice was heard in the -hall below. - -In the large living-room the army and navy men sat, until the daylight -sifted in through the shell windows, talking of the perplexing -situation, while Maria was made to go to bed and sleep. The doctor who -accompanied the captain regarded her with eyes of grave concern. - -“She must not be overexcited. She is outwardly calm but her heart acts -queerly. It may snap at any moment,” he had told the lads. - -“I have received a long letter from your friend, Colonel Martinez,” the -captain exclaimed to the midshipmen after disposing of a steaming cup -of coffee. “He said he would willingly surrender to General Wilson if -the price on his head were removed, and he sent me papers and documents -which I have already sent to the governor-general in Manila which prove -Martinez’s innocence of certain crimes committed in Luzon and implicate -a Filipino now high in the good graces of the government.” - -Phil thoughtfully sent Lopez to Maria to tell her of Captain Blynn’s -news and then gave Captain Blynn the story of the recent tragedy on the -floor above. - -“Poor Rodriguez,” the captain murmured. “If he had taken the other -side he would now be alive. The money,” he added, his face troubled--“I -am too late. I promised him I would come, but I was delayed by -important matters with the general.” - -“A search at once,” Phil exclaimed rising hastily from his chair; “they -can’t have gone far with those heavy chests.” - -Lopez smiled grimly. - -“Señor, it would be impossible to follow them. By now the treasure is -either carefully hidden or else in a banka hurrying up the river to -Espinosa’s stronghold. We must capture Espinosa; where he is the money -will be also.” - -“Quite right, Lopez,” Captain Blynn agreed. “It’s not pleasant to hike -in this country at night either, young man,” he added to Phil, whose -sudden show of excitement in the prospect of another fight had died -down; “every trail is trapped, and I don’t relish a green bamboo spear -through me even for all old Rodriguez’s money. Espinosa undoubtedly has -planned this attack carefully and in the darkness we would simply be -wasting our time and be losing sleep. - -“Some of our friend Espinosa’s plotting, in the light of this affair, -is now quite plain. Rodriguez was in his way, and so is Martinez, but -I don’t exactly see why; and this attack was made easy through his -winning of Garcia, the trusted friend of Rodriguez. But how did he -learn of this money?” - -“Why,” Phil exclaimed, a scowl on his face, “Lopez tells me that Garcia -alone knew of its existence and coveted it, and readily persuaded -Espinosa to help him obtain it and share it. With that amount of money -they can make this war very difficult for us or they can escape with -their booty to Hongkong.” - -“Well,” said the captain yawning outright, “I must get some sleep. The -bridge is clear; I’ll wait here until you bring up the gunboat. The -general is coming himself to look over the ground. We’ve had reports -that the rebel army is massing at Matiginao, where supplies for a year -have been collected. - -“We’re going to have the biggest fight in the history of the war,” he -added in a sleepy voice as he lay full length on the wicker lounge. “By -the way, old man Tillotson promises all kinds of rewards to any one -who will rescue his son. He’s coming down himself--sailed from Manila -the day after he got the news.” - -Although the midshipmen and their men would have liked nothing better -than to follow Captain Blynn’s example for a few hours’ nap, they felt -that the startling news that the entire rebel army was collecting -upon Matiginao made it imperative for them to leave the situation at -the Rodriguez ranch in the hands of Captain Blynn and return to their -gunboat. So far their work had not been crowned with success. True, -they had exposed a traitor, but in doing so the American soldiers had -acquired a new and sagacious enemy in Espinosa. The remaining members -of the Katipunan society had taken flight, and had fled before the -vengeance of Captain Blynn whom they all hated and feared. Rodriguez -had been killed, and enough gold to continue the war indefinitely had -been taken almost before their eyes, and they had been powerless to -prevent it. This was not a pleasant retrospective dream in which to -indulge as they watched in silence the even breathing of the complacent -army man. - -“We seem so powerless against them,” Sydney complained. “Our enemies -are everywhere. One moment the natives about us seem friendly, and the -next they are sticking us in the back with knives. When we start on an -expedition the enemy know just how many men we have and where we are -going, so there can be no surprise, while they always take us unawares.” - -“But now, it’s different since Espinosa and the Katipunans have been -forced to leave Palilo,” Phil exclaimed. “In the last few days Captain -Blynn says our soldiers in the provinces have surprised several bands -of insurgents. So you see they have ceased to be kept posted by spies -at headquarters. - -“Espinosa is collecting all his men in Matiginao with the idea of -safety and a hope of being able to capture Palilo before the two extra -regiments arrive, but General Wilson will checkmate him by withdrawing -half his men to surround him in his mountain stronghold. Now we have -some chance; before, they simply knew when we were coming, and if they -couldn’t meet us with three times our number they kept out of the way. -But come,” he added suddenly jumping to his feet, “we are wasting -time.” - -The Americans returned down the river in their cutter, this time the -midshipmen taking turns at the oars, and it was nearly eight o’clock -before they stood once more on the deck of the “Mindinao.” The bodies -of the dead sailors were sent at once to the army hospital for burial. - -“Major Marble has been here twice to see you, sir,” the quartermaster -informed Phil; “he said he’d return again in an hour.” - -“Breakfast first,” Phil shouted to the Chinese steward, who came aft, -smiling blandly at the return of his officers, steaming coffee in hand. - -While they were still at table Major Marble arrived, and was told all -the news of the river. - -“The audacity of those beggars,” he exclaimed, “attacking in force -within ten miles of headquarters. It’s a shame, the few men we are -allowed to cover this entire country. The general sees now that what -is needed is concentration, but if we withdraw our entire garrisons -from the towns it will mean that the innocent people there who have -befriended us will suffer.” - -“I suppose you are right, major,” Phil said thoughtfully, “but in war -it seems to me that one can’t stop to consider the feelings of innocent -people where the success of the cause is concerned. Espinosa has twice -as many troops as the general, and they are fighting on their home -soil. They know every footpath. Some are not armed with a rifle but -are far more dangerous to us with their bolos and fanatical bravery. -We did not see his stronghold, I am glad to say,” he smiled grimly at -the words, “but we know that one thousand men held it successfully -against five times that number of Spaniards a generation ago. From what -I have seen I say concentrate every available man and crush this fellow -Espinosa before he gets any stronger.” - -Major Marble nodded his head in agreement with the views of the young -navy man. - -“If we could always do what our military training dictates,” he -answered sadly, “this war might not have begun.” - -“I shall go up the river in an hour,” Phil announced, “and if the -general wishes I shall be honored to have him on board.” - -“The general is waiting anxiously to know that,” the major replied -promptly; “that was my mission here, but your exploits so interested me -I had nearly forgotten my mission.” - -Within the hour the “Mindinao,” flying the blue flag with one white -star at her main truck in honor of her distinguished passenger, General -Wilson, cast off from the dock and steamed up the river. - -“That was a fine piece of work,” Phil exclaimed in admiration, as -he examined the cleverly constructed drawbridge built within the -twenty-four hours by the army engineers. Its width was just sufficient -to admit the “Mindinao.” - -Phil stood on the bridge beside the man at the wheel, piloting the -gunboat through the ever-changing shoals, while O’Neil in person heaved -the lead in the chains, calling out the depth in feet. - -After leaving the town the river ran through several miles of nipa -swamp land, the home of the carnivorous land crab, the crocodile and -the bandit Filipino. The gunboat continued cautiously, Phil keeping -the sharp bow within the deep water, sometimes so close to the thickly -wooded shore that he could have reached out and touched with his hand -the overhanging trees. - -Before noon the “Mindinao” had anchored off Rodriguez’s ranch and -the general and party were landed to view the scene of the recent -fight. The shore was lined with curious and excited natives, those of -Rodriguez’s men, who had been spared from the fierce attack. To them -the presence of the gunboat so far up the river was almost a miracle. -They pointed knowingly at the big guns and clapped their hands in -savage joy at the thought of what they could do against the enemy. - -Captain Blynn had taken the situation in hand and had distributed the -soldiers of his company to reinforce the native companies. A feeling of -relief was now manifested by all. They were confident that no attack -would be attempted while the gunboat’s guns frowned menacingly out -there in the river. - -“That’s worth a regiment,” Captain Blynn exclaimed as he saluted the -general and helped him from the “Mindinao’s” cutter to the bamboo -pier, pointing to the graceful white ship, standing sharply against the -dark background of jungle grass and banana trees. As they walked toward -the house Captain Blynn dropped behind and took Phil’s arm confidingly. - -“After you had gone my men found a native tied up in all sorts of -sailor knots with silk neckerchiefs, just under Rodriguez’s window. -Señorita Rodriguez recognized him at once as a former friend of her -father who she said had betrayed him. He was pretty well frightened -and to save his skin, for he believes we are going to kill him, he has -offered to show us the trail to Espinosa’s stronghold.” - -Phil shook his head in mystery. - -“I don’t know how he got there, unless----” He turned and called O’Neil -from the boat. “O’Neil, do you know anything about a native securely -bound with sailor neckerchiefs?” - -“Sure, sir. It was the one that crawled out of the window,” he -explained hastily; “the young lady saw his face spying on her father. -His name is Garcia.” - -“Do you know,” the captain said knowingly, “that he is the only -prisoner captured? There wasn’t a single wounded man in sight this -morning. It isn’t the custom of the country, you see.” - -Phil involuntarily shuddered. “How callous one becomes,” he thought, -“in war time. Think of maybe a hundred wounded men cruelly butchered by -brother natives.” - -Before they reached the house the party was startled by a rifle-shot -from behind them. Glancing about quickly they saw a large canoe manned -by natives appear from behind the trees and paddle directly for the -gunboat; a large white flag flew prominently from the bow of the boat. -Phil and Captain Blynn walked quickly back and sent O’Neil and his -cutter out to learn the meaning of the flag of truce. The general and -the rest of the party halted and waited, eager to see what this strange -move might mean. - -The boat came quickly back and Phil took a letter from a native’s hand -scanning it with beating heart. “For the general,” he said. - -All watched the general break the seal and fumble with his glasses. -It seemed ages before he finished the few short lines and handed the -letter to Captain Blynn. - - “Lieutenant Tillotson is my prisoner. I will surrender him safely in - exchange for the deserter Colonel Martinez. If you attack me I shall - have him shot. - - “ESPINOSA.” - - - - -CHAPTER XVII - -A DARING PLAN - - -Phil stood silently by, his mind occupied over the details of a daring -plan. - -The exchange proposed by Espinosa was out of the question, even if -Colonel Martinez had surrendered, which he had not done up to the -present time; and until his sins in Luzon were forgiven Phil knew that -he preferred his liberty. But this threat against Tillotson’s life -worried Phil. Espinosa was sufficiently cruel to carry it out, he was -sure. - -Leaving the group of officers, who were still pondering over the -contents of Espinosa’s communication, Phil went in search of Maria. -There were points in his plan which she could throw light upon. - -He found her in the house, heavy-eyed with sorrow and loss of sleep, -but she greeted him with a smile and waited patiently until the room -was empty before signing him to speak, for she saw that he had -something of importance to communicate. - -“How much dependence can we put upon Garcia as a guide?” he asked -eagerly. “I have a plan, and all depends upon whether he can be trusted -to lead us against Espinosa, if not willingly, then under intimidation.” - -“Before they killed my father and carried away the treasure,” the girl -answered, a spark of excitement entering her dull eyes, “Espinosa and -Salas got the information necessary for their work from Garcia, bound -and helpless where your sailors had left him. They refused to liberate -him and hoped he would be killed by the Americans. You can be sure,” -she added, “that he will take keen pleasure in running his enemies to -earth.” - -“And now for my favor from you,” the lad continued in a lower tone; “as -Garcia will take Lopez’s place as guide for the soldiers to the trail -up the mountain, I want twenty-five of your men whom you would trust -to the death, under the command of Lopez, to take O’Neil and me as -prisoners to Espinosa’s camp.” - -The girl gave a low exclamation of surprised horror, regarding Phil -fixedly, half believing the lad was out of his mind. - -“I mean it,” he exclaimed earnestly. “It’s the only chance we have -of saving Tillotson’s life. Your men must pretend to have deserted -after the death of their master,” he dropped his voice as he saw the -look of pain in Maria’s eyes at the mention of her father’s sad fate. -“Lopez will claim to have taken us prisoners and then deserted to the -insurgents. It’s a good plan,” he cried enthusiastically, “and is sure -to be successful.” - -Maria paled at the mere thought of such rashness, but seeing Phil could -not be moved from his avowed intention, she gave her consent grudgingly. - -The general was not so easily convinced. His natural and inherent -cautiousness could not be changed even under the combined persuasion -of the midshipman and his staff officers, Major Marble and Captain -Blynn, who were both enthusiastic over the conception of such a daring -strategy. - -“The very impertinence of it will make it successful,” Major Marble -exclaimed. “They will not believe that one could be so rash as to -willingly place his life in danger.” - -“You’ll have to stay with the gunboat,” Phil explained to Sydney, who -was visibly put out that he too could not be allowed to go. “I shall -take only O’Neil. The general has ordered that all the soldiers who can -be spared from the garrisons throughout the island be despatched to -rendezvous here and will need the ‘Mindinao’ to carry troops and shell -the stronghold from the river. If you find it possible take her through -the cañon; there is a trail on the other side from the westward. If you -are successful we shall have them between our two parties.” - -That evening Maria and her small brother followed their father’s body -to his grave in the family cemetery. The general himself read the -solemn burial service and a company of American infantry fired three -volleys over the grave of the murdered patriot. - -General Wilson established his field headquarters in the house of -mourning and before three o’clock of the next day the first of the -detachments of soldiers arrived and went into camp on the river slope. - -“We shall have about one thousand rifles for the attack,” Captain -Blynn told the midshipmen, after Phil had unfolded to him and Major -Marble the details of his plan to rescue Lieutenant Tillotson, “and by -to-morrow afternoon they should all be assembled here. The general,” -he added, “is very much worked up over Espinosa’s threat, and realizes -that it is not an empty one, but he still refuses to allow you to take -this terrible chance.” - -Within a short time Phil was summoned to the general’s room. - -“I cannot allow you to take this risk,” he said kindly, a light of -admiration in his eyes. “Why should two American lives be jeopardized -to save one? And perhaps some will say that Lieutenant Tillotson does -not deserve such a sacrifice at your hands.” - -“That makes me more anxious to take the risk,” Phil urged. “We did not -part friends, and I can’t help feeling that our quarrel has had some -part in his misfortune.” - -Under the confiding influence of the general’s manner, Phil told of his -affair with Tillotson, doing his best to make a good case for his one -time enemy. - -The general shook his head thoughtfully. - -“It is very hard for me to allow you to undertake such a rash -adventure,” he answered, putting his hand affectionately on the -midshipman’s shoulder, “but war is war, and if pluck will bring -success, Tillotson’s life will be saved. Tell me now,” he added, -seating himself and motioning Phil to a chair, “how far you have worked -out the details of your plan, for every point must be covered; there -must be no loophole for failure. Can you expect that each of your -twenty-five men will keep the secret after they have mixed with the -enemy?” - -Phil outlined each step as he had thought it out during the last -anxious twenty-four hours, while the general listened, his face grave -and thoughtful. - -They would start after nightfall, and by sending men ahead to announce -their coming would be received by the insurgents with acclamation. They -would spend the next day at the camp and Lopez would endeavor to keep -his men from mixing with the enemy, and the next night the gunboat -and as many troops as the general could muster would lay siege to the -stronghold. The remainder Phil had not thought out. Chance alone -must decide the outcome, but he hoped to save Lieutenant Tillotson’s -life and their own, and maybe by Lopez and his men commanding the top -of the trail they could aid the American troops in their fight for -the stronghold. When the attack was made he would use Lopez’s men to -prevent Espinosa from carrying out his threat against Tillotson’s -life. The gunboat must use its fire against the fortifications, but be -careful to direct its shell to the left of the stronghold, for he hoped -that his own men would be at the right near the trail leading down the -precipice. - -“There are a great many chances for failure,” the general said -thoughtfully as Phil finished, “but with your energy and perseverance I -believe you will win.” He shook the lad’s hand warmly in parting. - -“I wish I could go with you,” Maria said sadly as Phil bade her -good-bye; “but you can put your full trust in Lopez. It was he who -betrayed the Katipunan society to me to save my father’s life. How he -got the information I do not know, but if his act were known his life -would be forfeited.” - -Without ceremony Phil and O’Neil, their hands tied securely with ropes -made fast to their bodies and held in the hands of the make-believe -deserting natives, filed along the narrow trail leading parallel to the -fast flowing river. Two messengers had been sent ahead to notify the -insurgent leader of the joyful tidings of the important captures. Their -progress was rapid, and inside of three hours the house which had been -the scene of Phil’s and Maria’s strategy was reached. There the party -waited. - -After what seemed an interminable time to the anxious prisoners, a -challenge suddenly broke the stillness of the dismal woods and Phil’s -old enemy, Colonel Salas, stood before him. A great joy shone from his -dark vengeful eyes as he beheld the bound prisoners. - -“My chief will be delighted to receive such distinguished visitors,” -he laughed, kicking Phil viciously as he lay helpless upon the ground. -“That is for your cleverness of yesterday,” he snarled. “We’ll see you -are kindly treated. We shall give you all the refined initiations that -we can think of to make your stay with us pleasant and then----” He -stopped with a significant gesture. - -“O’Neil,” Phil whispered after Colonel Salas had left him to join -Lopez, who had assembled his men ready to advance, “I am afraid we are -in for a pretty bad time of it. But if I ever get the opportunity I’ll -make that little brown piece of pomposity pay for that kick he gave me.” - -“Well, sir,” O’Neil replied evasively, “I may have been in worse -situations--no doubt I have--but this one seems rather more -complicated. I think we’ll have many kicks and worse to pay back before -we can call our bodies our own and not footballs for these little brown -brothers to score with.” - -After a rapid parley the party were again in motion. Phil and O’Neil -were roughly seized by two natives and forced ahead up the trail. Two -or three times Phil’s foot slipped into yawning holes at either side of -the trail, but each time he was dragged back to safety by the natives -behind him. - -“This whole place is trapped,” O’Neil whispered, pointing to where his -foot had uncovered the top of a square hole some six feet deep, the -lantern carried by a man in front betraying to view the green bamboo -spears at the bottom. - -Phil shivered as he gazed down on the pointed sticks as sharp as a -needle, and poisoned, he knew, with a deadly vegetable sap that would -kill within the hour. - -“Be careful, Mr. Perry,” O’Neil cautioned in a low, anxious voice. -“These men know where the traps are, and will try to catch you if you -make a misstep--but they might fail,” he added with a shudder. - -A halt was called suddenly as they moved through a densely wooded -section of the level trail, while several of Colonel Salas’ men moved -cautiously ahead and appeared to work quietly in the jungle. After a -few minutes they reappeared and signaled for the column to proceed. - -“Spring traps,” O’Neil informed the midshipman. “They’ve detached them -from their springs. If we hadn’t known they were there one of us would -have caught his foot in a piece of innocent looking vine which would -have pulled a trigger and sent twenty or more spears across the trail -with force sufficient to penetrate a pine board.” - -Phil half wished that he had not volunteered for this nerve-racking -ordeal. After all what did he owe Tillotson? Had not the army man tried -to injure him in every way? Yet the lad knew for that very reason he -had asked to be allowed to risk his own life to rescue him. Then he -thought suddenly of O’Neil. His stalwart form was just ahead of him, -dimly outlined in the darkness. Had he acted generously to this brave -and willing sailor? - -“O’Neil, I am mighty sorry I brought you along,” he exclaimed suddenly. - -O’Neil stopped in his tracks so suddenly that the two brown men bumped -their heads with some force against his back and cried out with -surprise. - -“Why, sir!” he answered in an aggrieved tone. “Have I done anything to -displease you, sir?” - -Phil laughed outright, only to be prodded by the sharp bayonets of his -captors for his incautiousness. - -“If that’s the way you feel about it,” he said, “I am glad you are -here.” - -Inside of ten minutes, conversation was impossible, for they needed -all their breath for the precipitous climb up the face of the cliff -leading to the top of the mountain. The natives on each side of the -prisoners pulled and pushed them up the jagged and rocky trail until -their bodies were bruised and their skin torn in many places by the -cruel cactus and “Spanish bayonet,” which seemed to have been planted -by nature as a further difficulty for those who dared to ascend the -secret trail to the insurgent stronghold. - -After many rests, out of breath, footsore, bleeding and tired, the top -was reached and with scant courtesy O’Neil and Phil were thrown into a -nipa shack, where they fell unceremoniously on top of a sleeping human -being who awakened with a cry of alarm and fear, striking at them with -his manacled hands. - -“It’s Lieutenant Tillotson,” O’Neil exclaimed gladly, as he rolled away -to the farthest side of the small hut, to put himself out of reach of -the startled prisoner. - -“Who are you?” came from the figure, in a weak voice. “Yes, I am -Lieutenant Tillotson. Tell me I’m not dreaming. Didn’t I hear a white -man’s voice?” - -[Illustration: _UP THE FACE OF THE CLIFF_] - -Phil could see him dimly by the light of the camp-fire outside. The man -had been completely cowed. What terrible torture had been inflicted to -cause him to become such an abject figure, groveling before them, his -voice hollow, and in his eyes a light of unreasonable fear? - -“It is Midshipman Perry and O’Neil from the gunboat, Tillotson,” the -lad whispered. “We hope to save you if you will keep quiet and do just -what we tell you.” Phil could have wept in pity at the sight of the -physical wreck before him. He was shocked at the sight. Tillotson’s -eyes were dull and the face empty of hope. - -“You don’t know what you are saying,” he answered in a monotonous -voice. “No one can be saved who is brought to this place. Death is the -one avenue of escape. Oh! No one knows of the tortures I have endured -from that fiend’s hands.” Then his face lit up for a second as he -raised himself from the ground and stared at Phil, who had approached -and stood looking down pityingly upon him. “How can you save me? Oh, -tell me the truth. Are you not prisoners also?” - -Phil seated himself by the side of the unnerved man and begged him to -be calm and reserve his strength. After a few moments he told him of -the plan and his hopes for success. - -“Let us pray for success,” the captive cried weakly. “I had determined -to throw myself off the cliff rather than undergo another day’s -torture.” - -Tillotson talked for an hour, gruesomely dwelling on the details of his -horrible treatment by Espinosa. He told of his mission to the spy, with -the letter which Phil had taken from the dead messenger at Binalbagan. -The message was in Espinosa’s own handwriting, and warned the attackers -of the gunboat’s approach. - -“I see now that I have been repaid for my stupidity,” he moaned. “I -believed that I could unmask him and earn the thanks of the general, -but first I wished to get from him a full confession and implicate -his accomplices. I showed him the letter and told him I would call at -his house after visiting the sentries.” The overwrought officer broke -down and sobbed for several minutes before continuing. “I was a child -in his hands; I did not know his power. His followers trapped me and -carried me away by water, bringing me to this awful place. Every day -some new torture is devised for me. To-day I was suspended by my neck -with only my toes on the ground. That was the worst so far. I don’t -know what it will be to-morrow,” he ended with a shudder. - -Phil tried to console him as best he could, but a great fear had -entered his thoughts. If this terrible punishment had been meted out -to Tillotson, what would the treacherous and cruel Espinosa devise for -him? Surely something many, many times more horrible. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII - -A RIVER EXPEDITION - - -After Phil and his party had gone on their hazardous mission, Sydney -went aboard the gunboat to make ready for the work which had been left -in his hands. He felt it keenly that he could not share this dangerous -expedition, but there was some consolation in the knowledge that O’Neil -was with Phil. - -Another detachment, footsore and tired from its forced march from a -distant post, had arrived at the ranch, and the two staff officers were -untiringly arranging all the details for the attack in force. - -Sydney, upon his arrival on the gunboat, gave orders that all -obstructions be cleared away from the guns, and directed the placing of -iron sheeting to protect the officers and men who would be, with him, -exposed on the gunboat’s bridge. - -The plan of attack was to divide the force of soldiers; the gunboat to -carry as many of the men as her limited deck space would accommodate, -and the remainder were to go by trail, guided by Garcia. A sufficient -force would remain to guard the ranch, to which point supplies were on -their way up the river from Palilo. - -General Wilson would command the expedition in person from on board the -gunboat. - -At sunrise Sydney was awake, and already the camp ashore was alive -and the lad saw the companies drawn up, their rifles stacked, eating -their morning meal. Hurriedly dressing he was rowed ashore, but before -leaving he had ordered all his boats to be lowered for transporting the -soldiers to the gunboat. - -“Major Lukban, one of Rodriguez’s officers, will go with you as a -guide,” Captain Blynn informed the lad as he stepped ashore. “He -was wounded in the attack on the ranch, but he is well enough to go -on the gunboat, and he knows the navigation of the river. He is now -questioning an insurgent officer who was brought in by one of our -companies; they captured him in a village several miles from here. - -“Lukban is like a wild beast; they have just told him of Rodriguez’s -murder by Espinosa and Salas, so I suppose we had best keep an eye on -this unfortunate prisoner.” - -Captain Blynn led Sydney down to the basement of the ranch house. The -midshipman, when his eyes became accustomed to the gloom, gave an -exclamation of surprised horror as he saw a half-strangled native on -the floor with several others astride his heaving chest. Sydney noticed -the wounded major in a chair, looking down upon his victim, a savage -smile on his face. - -“It’s not strictly orthodox,” Captain Blynn whispered as he saw the -horror in Sydney’s eyes, “but it’s effective.” - -“A little more,” Major Lukban ordered in a cold voice, after nodding a -welcome to the newcomers. - -Sydney saw the native at the prisoner’s head slowly pour the water -which he held in a bamboo cup between the prisoner’s teeth. The -unfortunate man choked, while the veins in his neck stood out like -whip-cords. His eyes turned glassy and staring, while his colorless -face became a sickly blue. - -“You’ll kill him,” Sydney cried aghast. “It shouldn’t be allowed, -captain,” he appealed, turning to the army man. - -“Don’t you worry, Monroe,” the captain answered calmly, “he knows -within a few drops of how much the man can stand--watch!” he added -quietly, as the natives raised the prone captive to a sitting position -and struck him smartly on the back with their open hands. The native -coughed and sputtered; gradually his color returned and he drew great -gasping breaths. - -After the prisoner had returned to a comparatively normal condition, -the inquisitor reached out his hand and struck him smartly across the -cheek. Where his hand had fallen, a white imprint was left, dying out -gradually, as the sluggish blood flowed back again. - -“This is the ‘water cure,’” Captain Blynn observed as Major Lukban -fired question after question at the thoroughly cowed and now -tractable prisoner. “He will exact a confession from him which will -give us all the information we need. If you or I did this we would -be court-martialed and maybe dismissed but----” He ended with an -expressive shrug. - -Sydney turned sick at the sight of a human being tortured beyond -endurance and a fear rose in his mind as he thought of poor Phil in -Espinosa’s hands. As he watched, the native appeared to hesitate -in answering a question, but a wave of Lukban’s hand, bringing the -attending natives and the water cup nearer, caused him to answer the -question immediately. Once the native refused to answer and then -despite his cries of fear and struggles almost superhuman, he was -forced back upon his back, and his jaws pried rudely open with a stick, -while the bamboo cup was poised menacingly above his open mouth. - -The next moment the cup was sent spinning from the native’s hand and -Sydney had jerked the captive to his feet, and stood flushed with anger -and excitement between him and his torturer. - -“I shan’t stand by and see any more of this torture,” he exclaimed -forcefully. “It’s a disgrace for us to allow it.” - -Captain Blynn shrugged his shoulders, while Lukban glared angrily at -the indignant champion. - -“But, señor, I must have that question answered,” he declared. “It -will not injure him, and it may save us many lives.” - -“What was the question?” Captain Blynn asked. - -“Whether there is a third trail from the stronghold and how it may be -reached,” he answered. “You see, captain, if there is we must guard it, -for otherwise all will escape us.” - -Captain Blynn nodded, glancing amusedly at Sydney’s excited face. - -“I am afraid, major, that question must remain unanswered,” he said in -a level tone, turning and leading the way out. - -Sydney turned the half-drowned prisoner over to one of Captain -Blynn’s soldiers with orders to guard him carefully and to allow no -interference by their native allies. - -By nine o’clock two hundred men had been embarked on the gunboat and -five hundred more had started under the command of Captain Blynn along -the trail leading up the river; Garcia as leader was at their head. - -In the party on the gunboat were General Wilson, Major Marble and -Major Lukban; the latter, still sullen and angry with Sydney for his -unwarranted presumption in making him discontinue his torture, stood -with his former victim on the bridge of the “Mindinao.” - -Sydney headed the vessel into the narrow channel, cautiously picking -his way through the numerous shoals; one minute the gunboat clung -closely to the steep river bank on one side and the next it was -scraping the overhanging trees on the other side. - -From the masthead the lookout kept the soldiers on shore in sight, -and Sydney regulated his speed to just keep pace with them. He -thought often and with grave concern of Phil. What luck had he had? -His heartbeats quickened as he vaguely wondered if he were alive! He -realized the terrible cruelty of the Filipino leader, and Espinosa had -reason to hate the young naval man! - -The small house, where the midshipmen had unexpectedly met Colonel -Salas, flashed into view as they rounded a bend in the river, and from -the bridge Sydney could discern with his glasses far in the distance -the enemy’s stronghold, Matiginao, “the impregnable.” - -As the gunboat swept slowly by close inshore the soldiers waved their -campaign hats in silent salute to their formidable navy ally. - -“This, from here on, is unknown river, sir,” Sydney reported to the -general, sitting calmly talking with his adjutant-general. - -The general nodded and answered with a smile. - -“All right, admiral, I am entirely satisfied to rely upon your -judgment.” - -Major Lukban had during the gunboat’s progress up the river stood by -Sydney’s side, showing his appreciation of the lad’s navigation at -intervals by a silent nod, while at the same time he kept one guarding -eye upon his captive, whose crafty, sullen eyes roved incessantly along -the wooded slopes of the narrowing river. - -“This is not new to you then, major?” Sydney asked suddenly, as he -directed the ship’s head toward a large dead tree which stood out a -lone sentinel on a rocky point ahead. - -“As a boy I was brought up on this river,” the native replied sadly. -“Then many thousand of my people lived in plenty and happiness along -its banks.” - -“Where have they all gone?” the lad inquired interestedly, his eyes -gazing about for the signs of a deserted population. - -Lukban pointed to the tall mountains ahead of them. - -“Time and again the Spaniards have endeavored to drive out the outlaws -from yonder stronghold, and the poor people who made their living -on the river were mercilessly preyed upon by the war parties of the -contending factions, until none were left. Juan Rodriguez alone has -managed to remain, but only by his fearless courage and the devotion of -his followers. Neither side cared to provoke him in his security until -Espinosa coveted his lands and his money and, who can say, maybe his -beautiful daughter.” - -“Maria!” Sydney exclaimed. - -The native lowered his voice to a whisper. - -“Espinosa has had but one ambition all his life; to marry the daughter -of Rodriguez; but she scorned him, and to save her from his persistent -attention, Señorita Maria was sent away to Manila to school. Now he has -robbed her of her father and stolen the treasure which had been hoarded -for her. For many years Espinosa has been the head of the outlaws of -Kapay. Holding positions of trust under Spanish rule, he directed -the rebel movements and prevented their annihilation by the Spanish -columns. This identical work he has attempted under the American rule, -but his treachery has at last been exposed. Until he openly threatened -the life of Rodriguez, none of us dared to thwart him. His murderers -are everywhere, and his society of the Katipunan is far-reaching. -Nowhere in the archipelago is one safe from their vengeance. Maria, -woman as she is, has been marked for the assassin’s knife if she -continues to refuse to become the wife of its leader. Garcia, -Rodriguez’s trusted friend and overseer, was lured by terrible threats -of vengeance and hopes of reward to betray his benefactor. He had been -chosen by the society to commit the repulsive crime of murdering his -friend. He came to the Rodriguez house intending to kill the father and -carry away the daughter into captivity, which would have been for her a -living death. Through the administering of the water and the voluntary -confessions of Garcia, I have found out every motive which has actuated -both Espinosa and Garcia. The would-be murderer entered the room of -his victim, but in the light of the lamp could not bring himself to -murder his lifelong friend. He at least had remaining some of the -kindlier feelings in his heart. Turning out the light he was about to -despatch him with a swift dagger thrust as he lay innocently sleeping; -then hearing a noise on the stairs he withdrew into the darkness of an -adjoining room. It was Señorita Maria and the two Americans who had -remained to protect her. Seeing that to stay would mean discovery, -he escaped by a window, intending to meet Espinosa and his men as -they stole through the uproar of the bolo attack and tell him of the -locality of the treasure. Espinosa is a leader of no mean order. His -attack on the ranch was masterfully executed. Even though wounded, he -came unhindered through the thick of the attack, with his body-guard -of twenty faithful men. These were the ones who entered the house and -carried away the treasure chests. - -“When Garcia, escaping, reached the ground, your trusty boatswain’s -mate, O’Neil, was on the spot.” - -Major Lukban’s eyes were on his restive captive as he talked in low -tones to Sydney. - -“We must keep an eye on him,” he continued. “He has given me so much -information that he would be killed if he fell into Espinosa’s hands. -Knowing the danger he runs, acting as our guide, he may attempt to -escape.” - -The “Mindinao” was now where the dapper little colonel had taken his -involuntary bath. The river had become sensibly narrower and the shores -more treacherously rocky. - -The captive suddenly turned and excitedly spoke to Major Lukban in the -native language, his gaze meanwhile roving over the cliffs just visible -ahead. - -Lukban gave Sydney the man’s words in Spanish: - -“He says the gunboat can pass through the cañon, but you must keep -close to the left hand shore to avoid the huge rocks which the -insurgents will hurl from the top of the stronghold.” - -Sydney’s heart beat faster. They had not as yet come in sight of the -whirling maelstrom of water as it hurled itself through the narrow -gorge, but the top of the cañon was in plain sight. One huge boulder -dislodged from the heights, striking the deck of the “Mindinao,” could -easily pierce her frail steel shell. - -“Will you go through on the gunboat, sir?” Sydney asked the general -eagerly as the “Mindinao” rounded a bend in the river, and the muddy -racing water loomed ahead straight as if nature had laid a ruler along -its path. About a mile away the other end of the cañon appeared, a -white streak of light between the sombre rocks. - -The general regarded him in surprise. - -“How would you expect me to go?” he asked, a twinkle appearing in his -eyes for a fraction of a second. - -“I was thinking of the danger, sir,” the lad added hurriedly in -apology. “They’ll probably throw rocks down on us.” - -“The commanding general cannot always be three miles in the rear,” the -veteran replied, now smiling broadly. - -Sydney had sent word to the engine room that he desired all speed -possible and despite the current against them, the wooded shores were -passed quickly. - -“To your guns,” he called in a clear voice without a note of -excitement. “Major,” he added turning to the adjutant-general, “some of -your best shots might take station to pick off the enemy on the cliffs. -Those on this end I hope will be Phil and his friendly natives.” He -turned suddenly pale as the possibility occurred to him of shelling his -own people. - -The gunboat sped swiftly toward the cañon. Through glasses the jagged -rocks at the top could be seen covered with a curious crowd of natives. -Several sharp reports came muffled to his ears. The soft coo of -the alarm concha vibrated above the stillness. He called his three -gun-pointers up on the bridge and cautioned them with painstaking care -of their important duty. “Shoot at the middle and the left; Captain -Perry is on that mountain and I hope at this end. All three will fire -together and I will control from here.” - -The men listened gravely and returned to their guns. - -“Load,” Sydney ordered harshly. The breech-blocks clicked shut and the -crew stood expectantly alert. The soldiers, unaccustomed to artillery, -unconsciously edged away from the three bow guns. - -“Set your sights at 1,500 yards,” Sydney directed, at the same time -giving a signal to the helmsman to hold the ship steady on her course. - -“Fire when you’re on, aim at the edge of the rock,” he said in a tense -voice. - -The three guns roared almost in unison and three black dots winged -swiftly out toward the frowning cliffs ahead of the gunboat. Three dull -brown splashes suddenly appeared just under the edge of the cliff and -the reverberations died out slowly to an unearthly wail. - -“Seventeen hundred,” the lad cried out sharply, for the shots had -fallen short of the mark. - -The sight-setters corrected their sights by a swift movement of the -wheel under their hand and the air was again rent by the discharges. - -“Fine shots,” the general exclaimed excitedly as he leveled his glass -at the top of the mountain where the three shells had exploded, -scattering the rock and dirt in all directions and causing the -inquisitive insurgents to hurriedly seek shelter. - -“Rapid fire,” Sydney ordered calmly and his voice had scarcely died -away when a puff of white smoke belched from the stronghold. - -The lad’s heart almost stopped beating. Artillery he did not fear, if -he could return the fire. He was confident that he could take care of -himself with those three unerring guns, but this gun of the enemy was -mounted just where Phil had warned him not to shoot. He sickened at the -thought of disobeying the order, yet there was the menacing screech of -the shell in his ears, as it struck the water only a few hundred yards -ahead of his approaching gunboat. - -What else could he do? The gun must be silenced before the “Mindinao” -could proceed, and the gorge was only a thousand yards ahead. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX - -A WILLING CAPTIVE - - -The sun was high the next morning before Phil awakened from his sound -sleep. He had tossed on his hard bed listening to the half morbid -ravings of poor Tillotson. Ever before him was the fear that after all -he would be unable to save him. He knew only too well the difficulties -that must be overcome before a rescue were possible. He recalled the -difficult trails over which he and O’Neil had been led. At every point -they had been under the eyes of unseen men on top of the mountain and -within the range of modern rifles. There was not a tree nor rock large -enough to offer cover to the men who on the morrow would assault the -stronghold. His heart ever beat faster as he pictured the fight in his -imagination: The natives behind intrenchments, cornered, no retreat -open to them, fighting with the courage of despair; and the American -soldiers, fearlessly charging upward, giving no heed to the danger at -the top. On the summit, the lad knew, it would be a fight to the death. -The part he was to play had seemed only too simple in the light of day, -but now in the silence of the night, bound as he was hand and foot, and -guarded by cruel enemies who would gladly shoot him down at the first -show of force, all seemed different. O’Neil’s healthy body had long -since been wrapped in slumber and when Phil’s feverish eyes opened he -was up and seated calmly by the lad’s side. - -“There are over a thousand of these gugus here in the camp,” he -exclaimed as Phil with difficulty arose and endeavored to stretch his -cramped limbs. “I have been spying from the door there, and I see Lopez -has encamped his men right at the top of the trail, and the men who -were there have been sent somewhere else. The natives who are guarding -us are our own men, and one of ’em tried to stick his bayonet in me -when I asked him for some water to wash in. I wish they were not so -careful of appearances,” he added with a grim smile. - -This was certainly cheering news. Lopez then had won his first point -with the insurgent leader. Espinosa had believed his story. - -Lieutenant Tillotson still lay like a log, completely overcome from -exhaustion, caused by his torture of yesterday. Phil looked with -compassion on the weak, boyish face; he was breathing evenly, but his -skin was of an unhealthy pallor. - -“He looks ill, sir,” O’Neil declared as Phil turned away with a sigh. -“A few more days will do for him. He’s got too sensitive a nature for -soldiering.” - -The doorway was darkened by the entrance of two natives. Phil regarded -them coldly as they advanced, and led him not ungently by the arm out -into the sunshine. There they cut his binding cords and gave both him -and O’Neil a bucket of water to wash in. They had been on the point of -arousing Tillotson by a cruel kick, but through Phil’s insistence, they -left the shack without disturbing the sleeping man. - -After eating and enjoying a scanty breakfast, the two Americans -surveyed with great interest the scenes about them. - -“Do you see that gun there, sir?” O’Neil exclaimed, suddenly nodding -his head toward a Spanish howitzer mounted on the cliff just to the -right of the trail. “It’s manned by Espinosa’s men!” - -“That’s bad,” Phil replied anxiously; “and you notice, it commands the -river.” - -“Good-morning,” in Spanish from behind them caused Phil to swing about -quickly and gaze into the amused but wicked eyes of Colonel Salas. “So -we are to have the pleasure of your company as our guest, after all?” -the Filipino continued tauntingly. “General Espinosa is making great -preparations for your reception. It is needless for me to tell you how -delighted he is that you have changed your mind. He was very angry at -me for not insisting on your coming with me the other day.” - -Phil regarded the little native, a fine scorn in his eyes. He would -have liked nothing better than to have answered him in the same -ironical vein, but he realized that to do so and anger him would only -make more difficult their position. - -“He will be here to pay his respects shortly,” Salas continued -ironically. “Ah! here he comes now.” - -With his heart beating fast and the muscles in his throat tightening, -Phil saw Espinosa sauntering toward them. He was dressed in the uniform -of a Filipino general, made in the Spanish fashion, of a mouse-colored -duck with a rolling collar, on which a silver star glistened. He came -slowly forward, a wicked smile on his face. - -“Señor Perry! So! I have you now in my power?” he said in a low, hard -voice. “I knew that my time would come. Your cleverness caused me -some inconvenience. Colonel Martinez is still to be accounted for. -But”--and he shrugged his shoulders--“that is but a matter of days. -You can see that I am now master of the situation. I shall annihilate -your untried, inefficient volunteers with as much ease as I can kill -flies on the wall of a butcher shop. Your general dare not call in his -men from the garrisons in the north. After I have worn out and killed -those sent against me, then I shall attack Palilo itself. Then when I -have the city in my hands and your general has withdrawn or surrenders, -I shall wire to Manila my willingness to accept civil government. I -shall go through the form of surrendering to the vanquished Americans, -and shall be made the governor of Kapay. I shall then carry on my -authority under your own flag. Is it not a very clever plan? Ah, there -is one point that I have forgotten, a governor of an island as rich as -Kapay must have a suitable dwelling. Very well. Señor Rodriguez is no -more; his house is vacant and adequate for the worthy purpose; and the -señorita--how well the title of wife to the governor of Kapay would -become her! - -“So you see, señor, after all, Espinosa has lost nothing,” he ended -with mock politeness. - -Phil glared angrily at this vain, boastful Malay half-breed. How dare -he even think of marrying a girl like Maria Rodriguez? Phil knew that -she would rather die first. - -“Every man in the American army will fight you to the last fence,” Phil -exclaimed savagely. “Your villainy and treachery are too well known -among even your own people, who serve you only through fear. You will -never be made a governor under the civil government. That won’t aid you -to carry out your vengeful purposes upon those whom you might choose -to call your enemies.” - -Espinosa’s face paled slightly, and his eyes kindled in anger. - -“I am sorry that I cannot allow you to remain alive to see my prophecy -come true,” he replied with a cruel shrug. “And before I am found out, -as you Americans say, and displaced, I shall have enough money put -aside in banks outside of the Philippines to live in ease and luxury -for the remainder of my life. - -“These thoughts,” he added, “may cheer your last hours. It should be a -pleasure to you to know that you haven’t done me as much harm as you -supposed.” - -Phil glared at his tormentor, a bitter hatred in his eyes. How cleverly -had this half-breed played upon the credulity of the Americans! For -months this despicable native had ruled over both the warring parties; -on one hand controlling the native bands of insurgents, telling them -how, when and where to attack their enemy and then by his plausible -words and treacherous cunning had exerted sufficient influence -over General Wilson and his aides to enable him to so dispose the -scattered American troops as to make them impotent, helpless against -the insurgent ambushes and attacks. The lad noticed with a certain -satisfaction that the native wore his left arm in a sling. Was that -then the effect of his shot the night of the meeting of the Katipunan -society? How he blamed himself for not having taken a more careful aim; -he remembered with disappointment that when he had pulled the trigger -of his revolver, his aim had been to the left of Espinosa’s body. -Phil’s gaze was not lost on the half-breed. With a snarl he glanced -down at his almost helpless arm. - -“For this I took Rodriguez’s life with my own hands, although Garcia -had been chosen for the deed,” he exclaimed darkly, “and for this I -shall force his daughter to become the wife of Manuel Espinosa.” - -Phil gasped, a flood of angry blood mounting to his temples. - -“It was I who fired the shot,” the lad cried exultantly, “and the next -time you won’t get off so easily.” - -Espinosa in sullen rage regarded the angry midshipman through his -slit-like eyes. - -“You?” he cried in unfeigned surprise. “How did you get there?” - -“I was there,” Phil replied quickly, a keen satisfaction entering his -thoughts at being able to beard the lion in his den, “and afterward -exposed you to the general--but,” he asked suddenly, “why did you -desert? If you hadn’t we would have had a pleasant little hanging party -in the Plaza the next morning.” - -Espinosa was evidently enraged at the lad’s daring words. - -“You are brave,” he said suddenly, a spark of suspicion coming into his -mind, “to speak this way before me knowing that I can have you hung, or -tortured, by simply giving the order.” - -“I know your yellow soul too well,” Phil declared in answer, “to -believe that anything I might say now would influence the plan for -revenge which you have already made. But I am curious to know why you -left Palilo so suddenly. Did you believe that Rodriguez would betray -you?” - -The outlaw glared at the midshipman, his hands twitching longingly to -take forcible hold on his tormentor. - -“Because of that shot,” Espinosa answered finally, “I feared there -might have been an enemy at the meeting and I feared Captain Blynn’s -hand,--I would give a box of old Rodriguez’s gold to have him here a -prisoner,” he added, a flash of terror in his eyes. - -“He may be here any moment now,” Phil said quietly. Then he would have -bitten off his tongue as he saw the sudden gleam of suspicion in his -enemy’s eyes. - -Espinosa gave the lad a searching look. “What do you mean?” he asked -casting a glance of fear about him. - -“Oh, nothing,” the lad answered carelessly, “only he knows you killed -Rodriguez, stole his money and tried to carry off his daughter; also -by this time he will know that I’m a prisoner in your hands. And if -for no other reason, you hold Lieutenant Tillotson, and his father is -overturning the war department to rescue him. You made a bad fist of it -there.” - -Phil had been watching the native leader’s anxious face, as he glanced -about him as if half fearing the big American to appear suddenly from -the ground. He now saw it light up with keen enjoyment as his eyes -encountered something which amused him. Looking up quickly the lad -uttered an exclamation of horror as he realized with overwhelming -force the true position in which he had placed himself and his trusted -boatswain’s mate. - -O’Neil, bound hand and foot, had been triced up, his toes just resting -on the ground, and his strong bronzed face swollen and blue from a -strangling rope knotted about his neck, the end thrown over a framework -apparently built for this diabolical torture. - -Phil turned his face away. He saw as through a red mist the throngs -of curious natives who had quickly gathered to see their enemy slowly -murdered before their eyes. - -Espinosa gave a guttural order and immediately Phil was seized and -forced to gaze at the revolting torture of his companion. - -“We shall not kill him yet,” Espinosa said, while he smiled in keen -delight at the discomfited midshipman. “I have promised my men a field -day. We have many amusing ways of treating our guests,--but,” he added, -“before your turn comes I wish some information which I know you can -give. - -“Where is General Wilson?” he asked anxiously, “and is it true that -your gunboat is in the river?” - -“Where are your scouts?” Phil exclaimed haughtily. “Ask them, not your -prisoner.” - -“I choose to ask my prisoner,” the native retorted with a meaning -glance at those who held Phil’s head turned so that he must see out of -the tail of his eyes the cruel suffering of O’Neil. - -“Your prisoner does not choose to answer,” the lad declared stoutly. - -The next second Phil was jerked suddenly upon his back, and his hands -and feet hauled out, spread eagle fashion to stakes driven in the solid -ground. He was quite helpless, and the pain in his arms and legs was -excruciating. He opened his mouth to cry out when quickly a wedge of -hard wood was inserted, holding his jaws wide apart. - -He closed his eyes and stiffened his muscle in a supreme endeavor to -withstand the pain and prevent himself showing his suffering to the -delighted natives. - -“Now maybe you will consider your answer--Colonel Salas, a little water -may loosen his tongue,” he heard the cruel voice of Espinosa say. - -A horrible fear overcame the lad. The water cure was to be given -him. He was to be half drowned. To be made to feel all the torturing -sensations of a drowning man; not once but many times, until his -spirit was broken and he would answer questions which would make him -traitorously injure his own cause. His eyes opened, and he saw dimly -Espinosa’s mocking face above him. The sun had flamed forth from under -a cloud and burned down unmercifully on his staring eyes. He noted -vaguely that it had passed the meridian. Then a terrible fear came into -his mind. Where were the gunboat and the soldiers? Surely by this time -they would have made their presence known. Had the gunboat run aground -and the expedition been delayed? Would a delay mean death to him and -O’Neil or only one more awful day of diabolical torture? - -“If you will cease torturing my man,” Phil said with difficulty through -his wedged jaws, “I will answer your questions.” - -Espinosa laughed cruelly. - -“So you would dictate your own terms,” he cackled. “Colonel Salas, just -a few cupfuls. Captain Perry seems thirsty.” - -Phil swallowed the water as it was poured down his throat, holding his -breath long intervals at a time. It seemed to him that the water was -never ending; he had swallowed quarts and yet he drank. Finally he -could swallow no longer and yet the cruel hand above him poured the -liquid without ceasing into his wide open mouth. The water splashed -and ran out. He managed yet to breathe by contracting the muscles of -his throat and then taking a slow breath but even then he felt the -irritation of a few drops of water in his lungs and he knew if he -coughed, as he must in a second, that all the water in his throat and -mouth would enter his windpipe and fairly choke him. A feeling of -suffocation oppressed him, as if a heavy weight lay pressing on his -chest. He knew as yet he had not suffered, that this was but a taste of -what was to come. Once more, this time as if from a great distance, he -heard the cold, sinister voice of the half-breed. - -“Before it is too late,” he said, “will you answer my questions?” - -Phil opened his eyes and gazed at his tormentors. Then he closed them -and steeled himself to what was to come. - -He felt his nose held securely by muscular fingers and his head thrown -back, making a reservoir of his mouth, which was kept full of water. - -Just before he closed his eyes Phil had taken a full breath and now -with his lungs full of air he knew that the agony was less than two -minutes away. Strong swimmer as he was, he knew that was the limit of -his endurance, and then afterward would come the sickening sensation -of water agonizingly breathed into his lungs. Congestion would follow -and if there was any trouble with his heart it would stop. If not, -the cruel Colonel Salas who, with a delighted smile, was pouring the -water, would stop and free the lad’s mouth of water, permitting him to -regain his breath, working over him as if he were a half-drowned man, -and after he had been brought to by artificial respiration, the cruel -torture would be begun again and carried out until he agreed to do his -enemy’s bidding. - -Those two minutes were the longest in the lad’s life. His entire past -flashed before his eyes and he shed tears of disappointment at the -thought that this might be his death. He wondered how much time had -passed. Then he began to count the seconds, but soon stopped in horror; -it was too much like self-destruction. He held his breath now tightly, -allowing just a little air at a time to escape through his throat. He -opened his eyes once or twice, but he could see nothing but a fiery -sun overhead. He had the sensation that his entire body was swelling. -Every vein seemed to have hardened. The sweat poured from his forehead, -stinging his eyes. - -He could hold his breath no longer. His blood throbbed painfully in his -temples. An awful nausea overcame him, and he gasped for air. - -Then a sharp sound as of the discharge of a cannon sounded in his ears -and he fought and struggled with the strength of a score of men for the -precious air. - - - - -CHAPTER XX - -THE STRUGGLE FOR THE STRONGHOLD - - -While Phil and O’Neil were being tortured by Espinosa, Lopez had kept -watch from his station, guarding the trail leading up the precipitous -mountain from the valley below. His eyes fascinatedly held upon the -scene in front of him had nevertheless guardedly turned backward, -scanning anxiously the wooded foothills below him and the vista of -the river as it entered the cañon. As yet no signs of the rescuers -were visible. He trembled when he saw that Espinosa had determined to -give the midshipman the water torture. But few white men had survived -its harshness. Lopez’s face wore an increasingly anxious look as the -minutes dragged into hours. The sun had passed the meridian and was -dipping slowly in the western sky. His own men had not left their -posts; each understood his duty; Rodriguez’s faithful followers alone -had been selected to guard this southern bastion of the stronghold. -The faithful native could see a handful of Espinosa’s men at the -howitzer mounted to command the approach by water and farther along -the edge of the precipice small knots of men squatting under shelters -of bamboo. These latter he knew were to dislodge great boulders, -which had been delicately balanced ready to be thrown downward, five -hundred or more feet, into the racing river. Those who dared to enter -the treacherous waters of the cañon must run the gauntlet of these -huge rocks, but Lopez knew that the Americans would take any risk to -reach the trail leading away from the stronghold and further into the -mountain fastness, over which the trapped insurgents would endeavor to -escape. - -Several hundred natives, their weapons in hand, had gathered about -their cruel leader. Every eye was turned in rapt enjoyment toward the -delighting spectacle of the torture of a despised American. None save -Lopez and his faithful guards had observed the glint of steel far down -in the valley below. None save he discerned two small white poles -creeping along above the high trees on the river bank. He glanced -uneasily toward the torture. Phil was on his back securely bound, while -Colonel Salas held above his head a long bamboo cane filled with water. - -Lopez whispered an order to a native sergeant and the latter -noiselessly edged his way in the direction of the sailor, now -apparently senseless, deserted by those who had been torturing him, now -that they were being indulged in a more interesting spectacle. - -Lopez, his heart beating and his bronze face set determinedly, watched -the two topmasts of the gunboat as they traveled toward the bend in -the river. The next second the “Mindinao’s” white bow came slowly, -majestically from behind the land and turned gracefully up the river -toward the cañon. At the foot of the trail khaki-clad figures suddenly -appeared and mounted slowly up the narrow path. He could see the guides -in front clearing and uncovering the treacherous man traps. His men -had now seen the approaching deliverers and their black eyes snapped -excitedly. Any one with half an eye would have known that something -out of the ordinary was going forward. The eager brown soldiers of -Rodriguez moved about restlessly, glancing excitedly down into the -valley below them. Fortunately the leader and his followers were too -absorbed in watching the suffering of poor Phil to take heed of the -strange behavior of the deserters from Rodriguez. - -Lopez saw the little gunboat stop suddenly in the river and he observed -plainly groups of men at the bow guns. Then came a flash of flame from -her white hull and a reverberation which shook the mountain stronghold -to its foundation. - -The tortured and half-dead Americans were forgotten; their captors had -rushed away to see the meaning of this interruption. It was but the -work of an instant for the watchful Lopez to sever with a few swift -strokes of his bolo the cords that bound his white chief. O’Neil was -likewise cut down, and the two nearly lifeless men were dragged to the -safety of that part of the stronghold guarded by Lopez and his small -band. - -Shell after shell came speeding up from the gunboat, and meanwhile the -khaki-clad soldiers, unobserved, toiled onward up the slope. - -“To your posts,” Espinosa cried out in alarm. “Open fire with that -gun.” The surprised and terrified leader raved like a madman, taking -all to task for their stupidity. Phil had been released so promptly, -while all was uproar and confusion, that as yet the insurgents had -not realized that Lopez and his men were against them. Espinosa, in -a fever of excitement, himself ran to the howitzer and with his own -hands pointed and fired the first shot. But that was the last shot the -gun would ever fire, for Lopez with a number of his men pushed quietly -forward, cutting its binding ropes and shoved it over the edge of the -cliff from which it crashed downward to the river below. - -Espinosa turned aghast and met the cold, defiant eye of Lopez. In them -he read his doom. Lopez’s sharp bolo was already circling about his -head. But the next second it had flashed harmlessly by and rattled on -the rocky ground. Fearful of his life Espinosa had dodged the blow -aimed at him and had taken flight, screaming as he ran for his men to -open fire on the traitors. The shells of the gunboat seemed to fall in -every part of the stronghold and the havoc of their explosions was -terrible to witness; but the small band under Lopez remained unharmed. - -Mad with fear, the natives who had been witnessing Phil’s torture, upon -hearing the terrifying words of their leader and seeing the awful havoc -behind them caused by the bursting shell, charged boldly on the natives -in their front, believing that in that direction lay their one avenue -of escape, but a well directed volley from Lopez’s men made them recoil -in disorder. - -Like one who is chained, powerless in the grip of an unnerving -nightmare, Phil felt rather than saw the wild scenes about him. He -heard the sharp rattle of musket fire and the sonorous discharge of -cannon, the wild, vibrant cries of the natives as they dashed now -forward and again retreating from the clash of contact and the avenging -strokes of bayonet and bolo. By a mighty effort he struggled to his -feet and leaned heavily for support upon the bamboo frame of his -prison. His lungs seemed on fire and a red mist was still in his eyes. -The riot of forms about him confused his brain and made him dizzy. -Then his eyes fell upon the body of O’Neil lying on the ground where -the natives had dragged him; the cruel marks of the rope stood out in -blue welts on his muscular neck. His eyes were closed, but the lad saw -with joy that he was alive. He knelt by the sailor’s side ministering -to him as tenderly as if he were a child. Then in great anxiety he saw -that Lopez’s men were slowly giving ground. Stubbornly they fought, but -the overwhelming ranks of the enemy, now alive to the actual conditions -and spurred forward by their leaders, came frantically forward across -the open ground. - -Phil dragged the senseless body of the sailor back until they were on -the very edge of the hill and then a sight which made him mad with joy -caused him to stand upright and swing his hat jubilantly, unheeding the -leaden missiles on all sides. There scarcely a hundred yards below him -struggling forward and upward was Captain Blynn and his five hundred -soldiers. Dropping the sailor’s head he rushed madly into the company -of loyal natives. - -“Charge them,” he cried, beside himself with eagerness, for he saw -that if the enemy, one thousand strong, should obtain possession of the -top of the trail the struggling men below would never reach the top -alive, and their retreat could mean but one thing--a rout and massacre. - -The natives did not understand the lad’s words, but his meaning was -only too plain as he snatched a rifle from the ground and led the -remnant of that plucky band. - -The next moment he was in the midst of the shrieking horde. In -his nostrils was the reek of the Malay, almost sickening in its -overpowering pungency. Blow after blow at his body he warded off with -the barrel of his rifle. - -Now the savage horde had given way and his men had quickly closed in, -warily protecting their flanks, knowing full well the cunning of their -enemy. To his left the lad saw hundreds of natives hurling rocks into -the river below them, and he cut a lane toward them, yelling to the -loyal natives to prevent what he feared would be the destruction of his -ship. From below the ominous rattle of a Colt gun gladdened his heart -and he saw with delight the men on the cliffs flee in terror, leaving -great boulders balanced menacingly on the very edge of the abyss. An -American cheer rang out from behind him and he became dizzy with joy -at the good news it brought. He read in the natives’ eyes a look of -terror at the sudden appearance of an unlooked for enemy, and at the -same instant he realized that if he and his loyal natives were to be -saved he must extricate them from this dangerous position between the -fire of the two opposing forces. He looked wildly about him for Lopez, -but he was nowhere in sight, and already the soldiers had begun to -open a withering fire in their direction. Mad with their exertions, -brought suddenly face to face with the enemy, the soldiers would have -no discretion; friend and foe alike were mixed in one writhing mass of -brown. - -Then a sinister face showed itself on his right hand and all thoughts -of safety were thrown to the winds. Espinosa, the tyrant and murderer, -was within his reach. With a score of men as a body-guard he was -hurrying away, deserting the field of battle. The midshipman pressed -against the enemy to his right, fighting his way even through the -remnant of the loyal natives, crying out to them to follow, while -behind him he could hear the heavy footfalls of the soldiers. - -[Illustration: _HE GAZED DOWN INTO THE STILL FACE_] - -A body brushed him nearly off his feet and he turned toward it, his -rifle raised as if to ward off an expected blow and then as his eyes -fell upon the disheveled figure, he gave a cry of delight. - -“O’Neil,” he shouted above the noise of the fighting, as he put his arm -about the great figure to steady himself from the force of the impact -from the khaki-clad soldiers pressing eagerly upon them. - -“There’s that devil,” the sailor cried in smothered rage, and Phil saw -with astonishment that O’Neil had naught but his bare hands though -the lust of battle was in his eyes. The horror of his recent torture -pressed heavily on his mind and he was bending every exertion to reach -the retreating insurgent leader. - -So closely did the Americans press their foes that the lifeless body of -Lieutenant Tillotson was abandoned, and Phil stopped, kneeling at his -side and gazed down into the still face. There was a deep wound in the -neck. Phil saw that the troubled spirit had been released. Ahead the -pursuers had stopped and were firing fiercely in the direction of the -retreating enemy. - -“We can’t allow Espinosa to escape,” the lad cried, aghast as he -regained his men and saw with horror that many lay moaning on the -ground. - -“They’re intrenched there, sir,” a sergeant exclaimed. “It would be -suicide to charge them;” but Phil had gone too far and had suffered too -much to be stopped by any thoughts of discretion or danger. - -“Charge, I say,” he cried; “that murderer Espinosa must not escape.” - -The sergeant from his security on the ground gazed up at the lad, -believing quite properly that he had lost his mind, but before he could -be stopped, Phil was beyond reach, charging blindly forward, while from -the intrenchments came a volume of fire which it seemed folly to face. - -The seasoned old sergeant shook his head knowingly, but when an officer -orders a charge there is but one thing to do. - -As one man the line arose from its shelter and raced madly after the -midshipman. - -Hand to hand they battled--the natives with a courage born of -desperation, for their backs were almost at the sheer edge of a -precipice. Slowly they gave way before the onslaught of the Americans. - -Phil and O’Neil fought shoulder to shoulder and the lad in his weakened -condition, bleeding profusely from a score of wounds, never more sorely -needed the help that the brave sailorman could give. - -“He’s getting away,” O’Neil cried out in an agonized voice as the -stubborn defenders fell one by one before the avenging bayonets. - -The natives died bravely, in fanatical fervor, fighting to the last -man, not wishing nor asking for quarter. O’Neil and Phil at last stood -upon the brink of a yawning chasm while they saw, far below them, and -just disappearing within the shadow of the woods, a small band of -natives, while there dangled from the rocks at their feet the severed -end of a rope--the leader’s road to safety. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI - -THE GUNBOAT TAKES A HAND - - -Sydney gazed in consternation at the black speck clinging to the top of -the cliff. His hands trembled excitedly as he held his glasses to his -eyes focusing upon this spiteful piece of artillery. - -“We’ve got to silence that gun,” he said in a hoarse voice to Major -Marble at his side, as he rang the engine room telegraphs for full -speed astern. “They can’t miss us, and one shell would sink us. Yet -Phil and O’Neil are probably there.” - -“There are our men, general,” Major Marble reported, pointing to a -creeping point of color just emerging from the jungle and showing -itself against the neutral tints of the treeless mountainside. - -“Make up your mind quickly, Mr. Monroe,” the general exclaimed -anxiously. “Shell it, or else let’s try to get by; we can’t afford to -leave the neck of the sack open for Espinosa and his cutthroats to -escape.” - -Sydney saw there was no way out of the situation, save to silence -the battery:--one shot through the boiler of the “Mindinao,” and the -gunboat with all on board would be killed by the explosion or else -drowned in the madly racing current of the river. - -“Take a few shots at that gun,” he ordered hoarsely. The gun-pointers -when they heard the spiteful hiss of the enemy’s shell had, as though -by an order, ceased their fire and waited obediently for the command -which they felt sure the midshipman would give. They did not relish -being fired upon and not allowed to return the fire. - -Sydney’s glasses were upon the cliff: he saw a group of struggling -figures about the cannon, and then to his surprise and joy the black -object detached itself and dropped swiftly to the water six hundred -feet below. - -“Don’t fire,” he cried out quickly, but the gun-pointers through their -sight telescopes had also been watching the struggle about their target -and had waited. - -The lad rang up full speed ahead and again the gunboat sped toward the -cañon. - -“Open fire on the left flank of the hill,” Sydney ordered. - -The three-pounders barked, and shell after shell was sent against the -gathering crowds forming to attack the mere handful on the right, where -the trail ended. The soldiers under Captain Blynn could now be plainly -seen plodding upward. - -Sydney’s boyish nerves were at the highest pitch of excitement. He -realized that he was to perform one of the most difficult feats of his -life, and he had the life of a general of the army in his keeping. An -error of judgment on his part would send them all to their deaths. He -glanced searchingly at the frowning cliff, now scarcely a thousand -yards away. He could plainly see that at the top a fierce fight was -raging. The narrow gorge ahead seemed barely wide enough to permit the -gunboat to pass, and above it, he knew only too well great boulders -were standing ready to be dropped like meteors on the frail deck of the -“Mindinao.” - -“Are you ready there with the Colt gun?” he called loudly to the -sailors in the foretop, where the gun was mounted. - -There was no answer; a glance aloft showed him the crew of the gun -grouped anxiously about it. - -“Jammed again, I suppose,” he exclaimed. - -Closer and closer loomed the cañon. - -“Look out for the prisoner,” Sydney cried out as he saw the native, -his hands on the rail, about to leap overboard. Major Marble was -near enough to grasp him and the next minute ready hands had bound -him securely to the rail and from there he gazed up in terror at the -rapidly approaching cliffs. - -“There goes the first one,” Sydney exclaimed excitedly as a great -boulder swayed unsteadily and then rolled slowly over the edge of the -chasm and descended with the speed of a shooting star. Every man on the -gunboat was on his feet; above them now was the camp of the outlaws, -and several hundred such boulders were there ready to be dropped upon -their defenseless heads. The firing of the “Mindinao’s” guns had long -since stopped as the elevation was much too great. - -With a terrific splash which hurled the water completely over the bow -of the gunboat, the first rock took the water; but another and another -followed it in rapid succession, and so close did they fall that -Sydney felt the rushes of air caused by their passage. General Wilson -stood calmly by as unconcerned as though he were only a spectator at -a display of fireworks. Major Marble paced rapidly across the bridge, -his hands nervously clutching a rifle which every few seconds he would -discharge at the frowning cliffs above him. - -To add to the danger there now came the song of enemy’s bullets while -the water near the gunboat became disturbed as if from the fall of -hail. Occasionally there was heard a commotion forward and a man sorely -hit would be carried below decks to be attended by the hospital corps -located in the men’s quarters. - -Many of the soldiers and sailors had now opened fire with their -rifles, but the falling rocks disconcerted them. Suddenly the Colt gun -commenced its sharp drumming discharge. Sydney glanced aloft. He could -see his crew directing the stream of lead slowly covering every point -of the cliff ahead. - -A cry of delight rose from the Americans, and a cheer broke out from -the anxious but relieved men as they noted the immediate effect of the -leaden stream. As it swept along the cliffs, those who stood ready to -project the balanced rocks upon the heads of their enemy had taken -fright, and instead of waiting until the gunboat was immediately -beneath them, had in their impatience let go their rocks, and they were -falling harmlessly in the water ahead of the gunboat. Sydney steered as -near the opposite shore as he dared, fearing that a boulder might have -closed the channel. On top of the cliff the sound of strife could still -be heard. - -Major Marble and Major Lukban anxiously questioned the prisoner. He -alone knew the whereabouts of the trail which Espinosa and his men -relied upon to furnish an avenue of escape in case the stronghold -was successfully attacked. The Filipino officer held his revolver -threateningly before the frightened native’s eyes. - -“If you allow us to pass it, I’ll have no mercy,” he exclaimed. - -The “Mindinao” had now emerged from the dangerous cañon and the sound -of firing above became less distinct. - -General Wilson was becoming impatient. He had held himself well in -hand to steady the officers and men under him during the trial through -which they had passed so successfully. Now his anxiety was more than he -could keep to himself. He rushed up to the cringing native, taking him -roughly by the shoulders and crying out to him in English, a language -unintelligible to the terrified prisoner. - -But the general’s act was crowned with success. The insurgent soldier -had steeled himself against the threats of Major Lukban, even -reinforced as they were with the deadly revolver held to his head, but -the wildly gesticulating general had put a terrible fear into his soul. -Like all orientals he reverenced and feared rank, and this taciturn -American general had so suddenly turned upon him that he was too -frightened to do aught else but tell the truth. - -“Back there is the place,” the native cried in his own language, and -Major Lukban in feverish haste translated the man’s words, while -Sydney swung the gunboat about, reversing his engines at full speed to -keep from grounding on the rocky shores, and giving small thought to -the dangers of the madly racing current. - -Within ten minutes, which seemed ages to the eager Americans, the -“Mindinao” was anchored in the river and the troops were landed. - -Major Lukban with the guide, whose hands were securely bound to prevent -his escape, led the party through the tangled underbrush over the -secret trail which without the aid of one who had been there before -would have been impossible. Tediously the distance was covered, the -sounds of battle ever becoming more distinct. General Wilson’s age was -no handicap to him as he eagerly pressed forward behind the native -guides. - -The enemy, by the volume of rifle fire which came down to the ears -of the anxious column of soldiers, were making a desperate stand to -recover the advantage lost by the suddenness of the surprise, and -so absorbed were they with Captain Blynn’s men that those under the -general’s command stood on the level plateau of the mountain before -their presence was discovered. The sight of this unexpected force -turned the tide for the Americans and the terrified insurgents threw -away their arms and huddled together, expecting to be executed by their -enemy without mercy. - -General Wilson quietly controlled his eager soldiers, bent upon -annihilating these treacherous brown men now within their power. The -soldier mind knew but one style of warfare with a savage foe. No -quarter had been the insurgent watchword. Kill! kill! had frequently -rung in their ears as the fanatical hordes had charged down upon them -on many a battle-field. - -“Cease firing!” General Wilson’s commanding voice rang out above the -discharges of musketry, and the bugles signaled the order across the -battle-field. “Major Lukban, tell them no harm will come to them if -they submit without further resistance,” he cried to the native officer -at his elbow, pointing toward the panic-stricken hundreds. - -The Filipino major calmly walked forward, his hands held above his head -in sign of peace, and raised his voice in his native language. A hush -fell upon the babbling throngs, while the terror in their eyes slowly -died out and they dropped on their knees, giving thanks for their -miraculous deliverance. - -Major Marble and the native officer went fearlessly among the natives, -leading them to a point near the river, and placed guards over them -to prevent their escape and then, seeing that a struggle was still -going forward on the eastern side of the mountain, gathered a force of -soldiers about him and hastened to aid those still in the throes of -combat. - -Almost out of breath the reinforcing column arrived in time to greet -Phil and O’Neil standing on the brink of the precipice and hear their -exclamations of disappointment at the escape of the coveted insurgent -leader. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII - -THE ESCAPED OUTLAW - - -Lukban was the first to recover from the stunning news that Espinosa -had, by a miracle, escaped out of the Americans’ hands when all outlets -were supposed to have been covered. - -“He doesn’t dare stay in Kapay,” the native exclaimed after Phil had -explained to the general the manner of his escape. “The natives fear -him, but without his followers and with the incumbrance of Rodriguez’s -treasure, the dangers he must face will make him do his utmost to leave -the island.” - -General Wilson listened intently, his eyes wandering over the -victorious battle-field behind him where Captain Blynn’s men were -quietly disarming the now docile natives. - -“I fear we cannot stop him now,” General Wilson said disappointedly, -“but I suppose we should be satisfied with our victory. This means the -end of the war on Kapay.” - -Lukban had turned and was earnestly engaged in conversation with Lopez, -and then he asked several eager questions of Garcia, who had joined the -group. Finally he turned to General Wilson, his black eyes snapping -with renewed eagerness. - -“Lopez wishes to follow him,” he exclaimed excitedly. “He will take his -hundred men, who are only too anxious to see him captured and punished -for his many crimes, and especially for the murder of Señor Rodriguez. -If he is pressed closely he will make for the nearest point of escape -which by the trail is Banate. This Garcia assures me was his intention -if he was defeated. Garcia wishes to go with Lopez, and he can arrange -a signal by fires on the hill behind the swamps to be seen by the -gunboat at sea. The gunboat must go down the river at once and at sea -await the signal. Espinosa must attempt his escape by proa to Megras. -It is only fifty miles away and if he reaches there he will be safe for -the time among his friends living on that island.” - -Phil’s face suddenly beamed in smiles as Lukban’s plan slowly unfolded -before him. Highly delighted, he shook hands enthusiastically with the -speaker, until the latter cried out in pain from the well meant but -rough show of appreciation. - -“Major Marble and I will return with you at once,” General Wilson added -quietly to Phil after he had in but a few words approved the proposed -plan. “Blynn can settle the question of prisoners. I’d like to have -Espinosa behind bars before I wire to Manila giving them this news.” - -Phil solemnly told of the sad fate of Lieutenant Tillotson and the -general shook his head mournfully. - -“Maybe it is better so,” he whispered half to himself, but to Phil, -standing close by, these words from the old soldier’s heart came -distinctly. - -A detail of men carried the body of the dead officer across the -battle-field, and as they passed solemnly through the joyful troops who -had collected to cheer the white-haired veteran, the soldiers became -suddenly silent as their eyes fell upon the stretcher and were told the -identity of that figure underneath the flag. None had reverenced the -officer in life, but in death all were anxious to render respect. - -Phil told the general of the pitiful plight of Lieutenant Tillotson, -and of the cruel manner of his death, and generously praised the -doubtful courage of the army man. - -“It’s a glorious end for a soldier,” General Wilson murmured. “I have -always felt that I could welcome it, and now,” he added disappointedly, -“I shall probably die in my bed like an ordinary citizen. My career is -almost over; in another year I shall have left active service behind.” - -While the general and his party climbed down the difficult trail to -reach the gunboat at anchor in the river below them, Lopez and Garcia -with their trusty company had nimbly descended the almost precipitous -side of the mountain and were eagerly following the trail of the -fleeing insurgent and his ill-gotten spoils. - -The “Mindinao” steamed fearlessly down the river, her flag at half-mast -in honor of those whose mortal remains lay covered on the quarter-deck; -the soldiers who had given their lives in the attack on the most -formidable of insurgent strongholds. Phil and O’Neil were given -prompt attention by the surgeon and several ugly wounds were carefully -dressed. Phil was glad to relinquish his command to Sydney and remained -luxuriously in his cot. - -At Rodriguez’s ranch the gunboat stopped and reverently landed the dead -heroes, to be buried in the cemetery, and here General Wilson and his -adjutant-general disembarked to return to Palilo by road. - -Just as the “Mindinao” started ahead, after landing her passengers, -on its way to the mouth of the river, a native canoe paddled rapidly -from the landing, and ran up alongside of the gunboat. An excited hail -came from its occupant, answered by an angry cry from Major Lukban -who turned, his face deathly pale, and his hands trembling, to the -midshipmen at his side. - -“Señorita Maria is missing,” he gasped. - -The midshipmen were stunned at the suddenness of this unexpected and -disquieting news. Maria captured! What did it mean? - -Lukban declared that his first duty was to his young mistress and the -lads heartily approved of his desire to be landed to attempt to trail -the lost girl and her brother. - -The excited native was brought on board from his canoe and told the -eager men the meagre details of her loss. - -She and Juan had gone out to the cemetery in the morning, and had not -returned. A search had been made in the afternoon and the footprints -of men had been discovered, showing that the girl had fallen into the -hands of a party of natives. - -The midshipmen bade good-bye to their native friend who entered the -canoe and paddled shoreward, and then Phil rang for full speed ahead on -the engines. - -“The loyalty of these natives to the Rodriguez family is touching,” -Sydney exclaimed in admiration. “Garcia alone betrayed his friend; but -he did it through superstitious fear of the Katipunan society. Lopez is -as staunch as a rock, and Lukban, you can see, would lay down his life -willingly for his young mistress.” - -Two hours later the “Mindinao” had steamed through the harbor of Palilo -and turned her bow northward. - -During the night Sydney and O’Neil took turns with Phil in standing -watch on the gunboat’s bridge, carefully searching the shore for the -signal agreed upon with Lopez. Would he succeed in coming up with the -fleeing outlaw? - -The night wore slowly along and morning dawned clear, finding all three -of the Americans up and on the bridge of the rapidly moving vessel. - -No sails were in sight. A wide expanse of water was before them, while -on the port hand the low swamp land of Banate was in plain sight. - -Phil steered his ship in toward the bamboo town nestling in the hollow -of two small hills in the midst of the swampy mouth of the Mani River. -As they approached, the Americans could discover naught but the usual -listless life of a Filipino village. - -“I’ll patrol here,” Phil said, as he steered further offshore. - -All day long the gunboat steamed backward and forward over fifteen -miles of coast line. An occasional sail was sighted and overhauled, -only to find in it a handful of frightened fishermen. - -As night approached the gunboat was brought to a stop in the centre -of the line of patrol in order that it might be at an equal distance -from all possible points of departure, in case Espinosa had eluded his -pursuers. - -“If he has a proa in waiting, hidden in the swamps of one of these -estuaries, he will choose night for his escape,” Phil declared as he -studied his inaccurate chart, “and at night he can easily elude us, for -it is too dark to see a half mile. Our only hope is that there will be -no wind, and if the air is sufficiently calm we can hear the dip of -oars for miles.” - -Phil stationed his sailors as lookouts everywhere, with orders to -listen alertly and make known to him if they heard the slightest sound. - -The night drew on. The others had gone below for their broken night’s -sleep, and Sydney was alone on the bridge. A half dozen lookouts were -alert, peering into the night, their energies bent on catching the -faintest sound from the distant shore. - -Suddenly Sydney’s ears caught a dull sound which seemed to come from -the direction of the land. He listened intently, his breath held -tight. The dawn wind brought to his nostrils the sweet damp smell of -earth mingled with the pungent odor of smoke from the early morning -fires of the villagers. - -All lights were extinguished on the “Mindinao” and the midshipman knew -that the vessel was, even at a short distance, invisible. - -Now the sound came distinctly to his ears. It was the steady dip of -oars and their rattle in the locks. He could hear the low muffled swish -as the blades shook themselves clear of the water. - -Several of the lookouts reported in whispers the presence of the -strange craft. - -Gradually the sound approached, the boat invisible, while slowly the -gray streak of dawn spread in the east. The sound was now located ahead -and the boat appeared to be traveling fast, doubtless propelled by both -oars and sail. Was it only a fisherman going out early to spread his -nets? Or was it the outlaw Espinosa attempting escape, and carrying off -Rodriguez’s gold and the more precious treasures, Maria and Juan? - -Sydney sent one of the men to call Phil to the bridge immediately. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII - -COLONEL MARTINEZ - - -Maria watched with a heavy heart her young friend Phil Perry go -cheerfully away to put himself in the hands of the cruel native leader -in his endeavor to save the life of a brother officer. - -“I never expect to see him alive again,” she whispered sorrowfully to -her small brother as he stood with big round eyes of wonder gazing at -the military preparations for the attack on the insurgent stronghold. - -The next day she and Juan gazed wistfully after the long column of -khaki-clad American soldiers as they filed silently past the ranch -house, taking the trail over which she and her American friends had -ridden so merrily but a few days before. - -The guard left at the ranch, consisting of two companies of soldiers, -quietly stationed its sentries and took up the monotonous routine of -guarding the many supplies which were arriving by boats from Palilo. - -For several long hours the girl brooded over the situation, wondering -how she could aid the friends for whom she had learned to hold a high -regard. Bemoaning the fate that had made her a helpless woman, she -took Juan by the hand and strolled away up the wooded slope toward the -family burying grounds where the body of her father peacefully rested. -Reaching the newly made mound she placed upon his grave the handful of -flowers which she had gathered. In her heart was a great bitterness. -Juan, too young to appreciate the magnitude of his loss, chased -gleefully the monkeys which chattered in the trees about him, leaping -almost into his arms as they eluded his embrace. Following her brother -Maria listlessly strolled farther into the gloom of the forest. - -Suddenly a low whistle from deeper in the woods attracted her -attention. With startled eyes she stopped, her head erect and her bosom -heaving in sudden fright. - -[Illustration: _A MAN STEPPED SILENTLY FROM BEHIND A TREE_] - -A man stepped silently from behind a tree and walked toward her. With a -glad cry she ran to him. It was the officer known to the Americans -as Colonel Martinez. - -“I have heard,” he said sorrowfully as the girl incoherently sobbed -the sad news of her father’s death. “I would have come sooner, but I -believed the Americans would have been strong enough to prevent it.” - -“His last words were for you, Gregorio,” Maria whispered as he patted -caressingly her straight black hair. “He hoped that you would follow -his example and surrender to General Wilson. Why do you not take your -own name again?” - -“Sister,” the insurgent officer answered earnestly, “when my father -disowned me for fighting under Aguinaldo in the north, I took the name -of Remundo, and because I would not surrender after most of my men had -been killed or captured I have been declared by the government of the -islands an outlaw, and a price was put on my head. I am accused of many -crimes of which I am not guilty. I have an enemy, who now stands high -in government favor. It was he who harried the country using my name -falsely, and for his deeds I am blamed. Captain Blynn has my written -proofs. So you see I could not comply with our father’s wish before, -but now I am willing to lay down my life in order that Juan Rodriguez’s -soul may rest in peace, which it cannot do until his murderer has -received his just punishment.” - -While they talked Gregorio Rodriguez had taken the small hand of Juan -in his own, leading his sister along a tiny trail away from the river. - -“I have a few trusty followers awaiting me a short distance beyond,” -he added, “and I wish you both to come with me. Your lives are too -precious to allow you to be out of my sight.” - -Maria smiled happily and pressed her brother’s hand. - -After a quarter of an hour’s walk the forest opened and they found -themselves in the midst of a company of native soldiers. The men arose -from the ground as their leader passed, doffing their hats to the woman -walking so proudly with their officer. Gregorio stood silently in their -midst, holding up his hand to demand attention. - -In a few short lines he told his men of his real identity and of the -horrible murder of his father by Espinosa; of the expedition which he -had watched start out to attack the stronghold. To serve their best -interests, he told them he should surrender with his force to the -Americans, who would give them all fair and honorable treatment. Then -he raised his voice and excitedly cried: - -“Those who still desire to fight against their own interests under a -traitor and a murderer may go forth unmolested. At once!” he cried, -pointing to the trail leading inland, while his black eyes flashed. - -Not a man gave ground; all looked trustfully up to their leader. - -“Viva los Americanos,” one shouted and the woods rang with their lusty -cheers. - -“Will you come to the ranch with me and surrender there to the -Americans?” Maria asked, after the cheering had died away. - -Gregorio shook his head. - -“My first quest is Espinosa,” he replied earnestly. “At once we shall -march toward the stronghold. If he is captured or killed in the battle -I shall seek General Wilson and surrender myself and men. If Espinosa -escapes I shall follow him to the death.” - -Maria knew the native spirit too well to attempt to urge her brother to -give up this perilous quest of their father’s murderer, so she bowed -her head submissively. - -An hour saw the band on the march, with Maria and Juan mounted on two -ponies; quietly the native soldiers led by Gregorio Rodriguez circled -the Americans encamped at the ranch and struck the trail taken in the -morning by Captain Blynn and his five hundred soldiers. - -Long before they came in sight of the stronghold the distant rumble of -musketry and the thunder of artillery told them of the struggle at the -top of the mountain. - -Despairing of reaching the battle-field by the treacherous trail -already covered by the Americans, Gregorio led his party to high ground -across the valley from Matiginao. They arrived breathlessly at the -summit and viewed the distant figures of men fighting in a hand-to-hand -struggle. - -Maria gasped in fear as she comprehended the awful sight of the -struggle. - -“The Americans are victorious,” Gregorio exclaimed excitedly as he -saw the wave of khaki sweep from two sides across the broad plateau. -He saw the native insurgents huddled together in the centre of the -American soldiers. But his eager eyes followed a small band of -Americans and natives on the right of the mountain; he saw the natives -in front of them give way slowly, contesting the battle-field foot by -foot, while behind them he saw several score more of natives reach the -edge of the plateau and rapidly disappear down the sheer side of the -cliff. - -“They are escaping,” he cried in sudden alarm. “See, they are holding -the Americans back to give those fleeing time to escape. It’s -Espinosa,” he shouted hoarsely, beside himself with apprehension. - -Between him and the valley at the foot of the precipice, Gregorio knew -were many miles of impenetrable jungle, through which there was no -trail. Yet he must push through this formidable barrier in an effort to -cut off his enemy’s escape. Calling up one of his trusty lieutenants he -gave Maria and Juan in his charge. - -“Take the trail and join the Americans,” he ordered his sister. -“Come,” he commanded, selecting a score of men by a motion of his -hand. In another minute Gregorio, followed obediently by his selected -followers, had plunged through the dense woods straight down the -mountainside toward the avenue of escape over which Espinosa would soon -be traveling, while Maria and her guard left their place of vantage and -headed for the distant mountain top now in the hands of Captain Blynn -and his victorious men. - -Laboriously, but spurred forward by the eagerness of their leader, -Gregorio and his small band toiled through the dense jungle. The -distance was slowly covered and, almost exhausted, they were finally -rewarded by reaching the trail leading from the stronghold to the -northward. - -Gregorio uttered an exclamation of surprise as his knowledge of -woodcraft told him that a large force of men had recently passed over -this road. Surely he had seen but a few score escape from the plateau. - -Nothing daunted, in the lead, he urged his men forward. He would -attack, no matter what were the odds against him. Espinosa should not -escape! - -After several hours of strenuous marching a straggler was found on the -side of the trail and after a hasty interview gave the anxious native -the good tidings that Lopez was ahead on the same quest as himself. - -Hurrying forward, most of the time on a run, he overtook his father’s -faithful servant just before darkness arrived, and together, -unsparingly, they urged onward their tired men. - -Gregorio’s keen eyes were ever on the trail; in his heart was a -desperate resolve. The thought of escape of Espinosa maddened him -beyond endurance. The newly made grave in the family burying grounds -spurred him on to almost superhuman exertions. Lopez, hardened as he -was to toil in the fields, kept pace with his untiring young master, -but many of the pursuing natives were left far behind. - -“We are nearly to Banate,” Lopez said intensely as they saw the high -jungle slowly merge into nipa swamp. The cocoanut palms were becoming -more and more infrequent and the mud of the trail clung to their tired -feet. - -So silently had they approached the little settlement at the foot of -the hills rising from the delta of the river that the sudden barking -of a dog caused them to stop in consternation. - -With eyes open wide with anxiety and apprehension, Gregorio and Lopez -pressed onward through the narrow street. They saw the natives were not -as yet awake, the houses were closed and no human being was visible. On -the ocean beach they saw many native boats hauled high above the tide. -Anxiously they visited each in turn, but all were abandoned. - -The sandy soil gave them no news of their quarry. Many footmarks -were evident, but the tracks were so crossed and recrossed that even -Gregorio gave up all hope of learning from them the direction taken by -Espinosa and his men. - -Gregorio stood in deepest dejection at the edge of the beach; his eyes -sorrowfully scanned the dark waters. Had Espinosa turned off into -the jungle, allowing him to go by, chuckling in his sleeve at the -cleverness of his ruse? or had he embarked, and was he now sailing -rapidly away toward freedom and wealth? Many of the straggling natives -had now gathered about their chief and waited for his orders. They had -ruthlessly entered the huts of the sleeping villagers and had dragged -several of them trembling before their leaders. - -“But a half hour ago a large proa was launched from down the beach,” a -native villager spoke up. “It had been waiting, and we were commanded -to keep indoors on penalty of being shot. Through my bamboo shutter I -saw it start.” - -Gregorio waited for no further words. Hastily turning to Lopez and -Garcia he cried eagerly: - -“Light three fires on the top of the hill, the signal to the gunboat.” -Then without spoken orders a half score of men helped the anxious -Gregorio launch one of the small fishing boats lying high on the beach. -As Lopez and his men hurried away, the native boat, with Gregorio at -the helm, hoisted its bamboo sail to catch the light morning breeze and -disappeared into the night. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV - -THE GUNBOAT ON GUARD - - -“There’s a fire ashore there, sir,” a lookout called in an eager voice -as Phil accompanied by O’Neil stepped on deck, and the midshipman’s joy -was unbounded as he saw three points of light gradually grow into three -unmistakable fires. - -“The signal,” he exclaimed. “We’ve got him. He can’t escape us now.” - -Eagerly he listened to the sweet music of those hollow sounds caused -as he knew by the play of the oars in their rowlocks. Scarcely a half -mile away was Espinosa, blissfully unconscious of the presence of his -sentinel gunboat. Then a great fear came into his mind as he thought of -the cargo the approaching boat might be carrying. Were Maria and her -brother captives of this cruel villain? - -The anxious midshipman rang the engine bell for full speed ahead and -the little gunboat quickly leaped to life. Espinosa was as good as -captured. Inside of an hour day would break. - -“Keep a sharp lookout,” he shouted. The gunboat’s bow had turned -directly for the sound of the passing boat and he did not know at what -moment it would appear suddenly from out of the darkness ahead. - -Sydney and O’Neil stood beside Phil as the gunboat rushed forward. - -“That’s Espinosa, all right,” O’Neil exclaimed joyfully as he went -below, after taking a look about him, to get the forward three-pounder -ready. - -The two midshipmen strained their ears in vain into the night, but no -sound of their quarry was evident. - -The gunboat was again stopped and the word passed for silence. A -stillness crept over the gunboat. The sailors stood alert, silent in -strained attitudes of listening, but no sound could be heard to cheer -the now depressed Americans. - -“They’ve stopped rowing,” Sydney exclaimed, “and with this breeze they -must be going away from us fast.” The midshipmen gazed at each other in -consternation. What should be done? Should they steam ahead blindly, -awaiting the day? Might not the proa have discovered the presence of -the gunboat and changed its course? Both knew that ten miles to the -eastward treacherous coral reefs covered the sea, through which the -gunboat must navigate cautiously, even if it were possible to go at -all. Was the outlaw again to escape? Then their attention was attracted -by a new sound as the chug of oars came to their ears, but this time -from a direction opposite to that taken by the first boat. - -“It’s a second boat,” Phil exclaimed in a troubled voice. “What can it -mean?” The noise of the approaching boat came closer and closer and -then suddenly out of the night a great sail appeared, while a Spanish -hail drifted across the waters: - -“Espinosa is in a proa ahead of us. This is Colonel Martinez.” - -Both lads recognized their friend’s voice, even before he declared his -identity, and now with his mind made up that he must act quickly, Phil -called back: - -“I shall steam directly ahead for the reefs; stand by to take a line.” - -The active natives caught the tow-line heaved to them from the stern -of the gunboat, and the “Mindinao” at full speed raced toward the gray -in the eastern sky, while the proa astern lowered her sail and leaped -joyfully in tow of the steamer. - -O’Neil stood like a statue at the bow’s gun, his eyes endeavoring to -pierce the gloom ahead. His eager eyes were conscious of the growing -light. Farther and farther his range of vision grew; now a mile of -sea on either bow was in sight, but barren of sail. Then from out the -dissolving mist, the sailor saw a dim shadow and knew that the quarry -at last was found and in easy range. - -“I see her, sir,” he hailed joyfully. “Can I give her a polite -invitation to heave to?” - -“Don’t hit her, O’Neil,” Phil answered excitedly; “put a shell as close -as you can. She’s nearly up to the reefs.” - -A roar and a blinding flash was O’Neil’s answer to his captain’s words. - -Shell after shell was hurled after the fleeing boat but the Americans -could see no inclination to obey the order of the challenge. Now -silhouetted against the eastern sky, with a great spread of sail, -Espinosa was straining everything to escape. From out the sea ahead a -fiery sun arose, throwing its brilliant light into the eyes of those on -the gunboat. - -“Be careful, O’Neil,” Phil urged earnestly. “Señorita Rodriguez may be -in that boat.” - -“She’s safe with our soldiers,” Sydney called from the deck below, at -hearing his friend’s caution. “I’ve just talked with Martinez astern.” - -“Put a shot in that boat,” Phil cried, and the roar of the -three-pounder echoed his words. - -Then suddenly a gentle tremble of the “Mindinao” made her young captain -turn pale, as he rang for full speed astern. - -“We’re on the reef,” he cried in anguish. “What shall we do? Hit her, -O’Neil,” he called beside himself; “he must not escape.” - -Sydney had rushed aft with several sailors close at his heels and -taking the tow-line of the native boat astern, they hauled it up clear -of the backing screws until the outrigger was alongside the gangway. - -“Make room for ten of our sailors,” he shouted to Martinez. “We want -men who know how to shoot.” - -While the water boiled above the swiftly revolving propellers slowly -hauling the gunboat backward from its perilous position on a coral -reef, all but two of the natives in the fishing boat climbed nimbly -aboard and ten eager sailors, their rifles in hand, scrambled in. - -The sharp detonations of the three-pounder added to the confusion of -the scene. - -As he saw the “Mindinao” was again afloat, Phil turned his eyes to the -fleeing enemy. The boat, still untouched, was sailing swiftly away with -an ever-increasing breeze behind it. Then his eyes opened in surprise -and joy as he saw what Sydney had been doing. - -“Come on, O’Neil, she’s nearly out of range,” he called excitedly. The -sailor turned, took in the situation at a glance and seizing a rifle -from a sailor near him followed his captain. - -“She’s dropped her sail,” he cried, as a swift look over his shoulder -to mark the effect of the last shot revealed but a small black speck on -the water. - -“I am sorry, Syd, but I must leave you to look out for the ship,” Phil -said as he leaped for the side of the native boat and grasped Colonel -Martinez’s hands. “Keep us in sight and see if you can work her through -the reefs.” - -Sydney drew a long face, but he appreciated that Phil’s greatest desire -was to be in at the death, when Espinosa was captured. - -The boat shoved off and the bamboo sail, far bigger in proportion than -the sails carried by American boats, was quickly hoisted. The boat -appeared to skim over the surface of the water. The gunboat slowly -dropped astern, but now the proa had again hoisted its sail and the -distance between the two boats seemed to be ever the same. - -“We’ll catch him if we have to chase him the whole fifty miles of water -and then some,” O’Neil cried angrily. “I don’t see how I could have -missed him.” - -Phil smiled feebly. “You were beginning to get pretty close,” he said. -“They lowered their sail so as to offer a smaller target for you to aim -at.” - -“I thought I’d done it with a shell,” the boatswain’s mate replied -disappointedly. “Well, if we get within the range of this little piece -of iron,” patting his rifle, “I’ll take great pleasure in writing my -initials on that Espinosa’s yellow carcass.” - -The midshipman did not take this soft-hearted sailorman seriously. In -a fight, he knew he was as brave as twenty men, but with a vanquished -enemy he was as gentle as a woman. - -“If we can catch him alive, I don’t wish to kill him,” Phil answered -now, in Spanish, to include Rodriguez, who had not understood the -declarations of the disappointed sailor. - -“I claim the privilege of doing that, Señor Perry,” the colonel replied. - -Phil regarded him sternly. The native looked into the midshipman’s eyes -unwaveringly. - -“Why should you?” the lad asked. - -“Ah, señor, I had forgotten,” the native said earnestly, taking -his revolver from its holster and holding it butt forward to the -midshipman. “Colonel Remundo in Luzon, Colonel Martinez in Kapay, and -now Gregorio Rodriguez, surrenders to you as a prisoner of war.” - -Phil looked aghast, while O’Neil mumbled inarticulate nautical phrases -of surprise. - -“Are you then Maria’s brother?” the lad asked. - -Gregorio nodded his head slowly, still holding his revolver for Phil to -take. - -“Put your revolver back,” the midshipman ordered peremptorily. “You -and I never have been enemies--except for a very short time,” he added -as the remembrance of those two anxious days after his capture on the -“Negros” came into his mind. “Anyway, we have now the same objective, -that murderer yonder, but,” and he lowered his voice to a cold, hard -tone, “you shall not kill him if we can capture him alive. I forbid it.” - -Gregorio’s black eyes blazed, and despite the avowed friendship of the -native, O’Neil reached hastily for his revolver. Then as suddenly the -native mastered himself and with a shrug turned away his telltale eyes. - -“I know how you feel, colonel,” Phil declared conscious of the passion -in the native’s soul, “but I’d rather have it done regularly. We’ll try -him by a military commission for treason and hang him in the Plaza in -Palilo as a warning to all traitors.” - -Slowly the fishing boat overhauled the bigger craft. Now the distance -was but five hundred yards. The sun had risen and shone down on the -green opalescent water. A report of a rifle-shot startled the Americans -who had settled themselves for a long and monotonous chase. - -“So they are going to offer resistance,” Phil exclaimed. - -“Yes; let him have it, O’Neil,” he added as the sailor threw the muzzle -of his piece forward and looked questioningly at the midshipman. - -O’Neil’s rifle cracked and a figure standing on the rail near the mast -doubled up and fell forward in the boat. - -A fusillade of shots followed from the fleeing boat, the bullets -hissing in the water dangerously near the dozen huddled Americans. - -“We can’t allow this,” Phil exclaimed uneasily; “they can’t miss us if -we get any closer. - -“Open fire!” he ordered suddenly. - -Ten rifles were discharged almost as one, and as quickly fired again -and again. The sharp rattle of the breech-blocks was continuous. - -By this time the Americans had approached abreast the enemy, but -above its rail no human being was visible. Had all been killed by the -unerring shooting of Phil’s men? - -Scarcely twenty yards separated the two boats. The larger craft, with -sheets slacked, sailed silently onward. The helm swung idle; the hand -that had steered it probably now lay limp in the bottom of the proa. -Phil rose cautiously, his hand grasping the sail; he placed his foot -on the high gunwale in an endeavor to discover the state of the enemy -concealed in the bottom of the boat. As he drew himself up above his -companions, the two boats slid noiselessly nearer and to the lad’s -horror he suddenly found himself looking squarely into the black muzzle -of a pistol. Behind it burned the cruel eyes of Espinosa, while on the -latter’s face was a leer of triumph. - - - - -CHAPTER XXV - -CONCLUSION - - -Scarcely a second elapsed between the time Espinosa had leaped to -the proa’s deck and the discharge of his revolver, but in that -second Phil had seen the awful havoc among the traitor’s followers. -Espinosa himself, sorely wounded as he was, could hardly have helped -hitting his mark. Phil was conscious of a shot from his own boat -almost simultaneously with a sharp pain in his left shoulder, and saw -the would-be slayer pitch forward into the sea. In that second the -outriggers of the two boats came together and Gregorio and his two -natives quickly jumped on board to lower the captured vessel’s sails, -while O’Neil put the helm of his own craft over to bring the wind ahead -and stop their progress. - -Phil balanced himself on the sail of the boat, his eyes following -the bubbles which closed over the body of the wounded man. Then a -trembling seized him as a great black fin protruded from the water and -the sun’s rays reflected deep red against the green of the reef. - -“Sharks,” he cried hoarsely, balancing himself with a great effort, for -he had been about to plunge overboard to rescue his enemy. - -O’Neil as if by intuition had seized the lad by the foot and forcibly -hauled him back into the boat. - -The two boats were soon secured together and the Americans, putting -aside their weapons of destruction, looked down pityingly upon the -terrified natives huddled together in the bottom of the proa. Many were -wounded by the Krag bullets and several had died not knowing pain, so -swiftly had death come. Far astern a black curl of smoke marked the -gunboat. - -All hands turned to willingly and administered to the stricken enemy -and soon all the wounded were made as comfortable as possible, their -bleeding stanched, while the two boats were being steered toward the -west. The treasure was found hidden under the footboards of the proa -and this treasure had sealed the traitor’s doom, for in carrying it he -had delayed his flight, allowing Gregorio and Lopez to all but overtake -him. - -Inside of two hours the “Mindinao,” steaming cautiously between the -numberless shoals, took the Americans and their captives on board and -was steaming joyfully back to Palilo with her glad tidings. - -The wound in Phil’s shoulder turned out happily to be but a glancing -blow and under Sydney’s administration he suffered only the -inconvenience of carrying his arm in a black silk sling about his neck. - -As Phil brought his gunboat for the last time to her berth, there on -the dock stood General Wilson and his aides, and before the gangway had -been down a moment they came on board to praise the work of the navy -men, and hear the thrilling story of the end of Espinosa. - -A sad-eyed stranger in civilian’s clothes stood silently by as Phil -modestly told how the outlaw had died. Then he grasped the lad’s hand -while the general murmured a name which made the young man blush as if -with shame. He stood in the presence of Lieutenant Tillotson’s father. - -“My boy,” the bereaved man said in a low voice, “you have a father’s -blessing. The general has told me of your unselfish and reckless act in -a vain endeavor to save my son.” - -Phil turned away to hide his emotion. - -Mr. Tillotson, taking the body of his son, sailed the following day for -Manila. - -For ten days the “Mindinao” remained quietly at her dock, while from -all over the island there came to Palilo to surrender to the general -small bands of insurgent soldiers. Gregorio Rodriguez, the acknowledged -leader after Espinosa’s death, had sent word to all his captains to -stop fighting, and their obedience was instant. - -One evening somewhat over a week later, on board the “Mindinao” a -dinner party was in progress. The happy general, a weight of care -lifted from his shoulders, sat on Phil’s right, while about the board -were the well-known faces of his friends. O’Neil, barred by naval -etiquette from partaking at his captain’s table, in the shadow of the -night, stood near, hanging on every word spoken. The Chinese servants -with smiling faces flitted between the galley and the quarter-deck. - -Maria sat between the two midshipmen, and the sadness in her eyes still -lingered, but a look of admiration would kindle as she talked to each -of her two friends in turn. - -General Wilson held in his hand two unopened telegrams which had just -been handed him by an orderly. - -The general tore one of the yellow envelopes and ran his eye hurriedly -over the contents. - -“My congratulations, governor,” he exclaimed, as he passed the paper to -Gregorio Rodriguez. - -The native could hardly believe his eyes, for these were the words he -read: - -“Gregorio Rodriguez appointed civil governor of the Island of Kapay -to-day by the governor-general.” - -Rodriguez rose to his feet and strode quietly to the general’s side. - -“General Wilson,” he said reverently, “this fulfils my father’s dearest -wish. I would that he could know.” Then he dropped on one knee and, -much to the surprise of the gray-haired prosaic veteran, raised the -blue-veined hand to his lips. Maria remained seated, but her dark eyes -beamed lovingly on her brother. - -Then the other telegram was opened and a smile appeared on the -warrior’s face. - -The lads were consumed with impatience, for by the look in the -general’s eyes they realized it concerned them. He read the message. - - “I am appointed ambassador to Japan. Have selected Blynn as military - attaché and Midshipmen Perry and Monroe naval attachés to our - embassy. Wire their answers. - - “TILLOTSON.” - -The midshipmen’s hearts beat fast and they were about to cry out their -delight, when the tearful face of Maria caught their eye; and instead -Phil answered soberly, “I doubt if we have sufficient rank to accept.” - -O’Neil had heard enough, and as he moved forward toward his hammock -slung on the forecastle he murmured gruffly: - -“I can’t let ’em go alone. They need me to look out for them.” And Phil -and Sydney, had they heard, would have said he was right. - - -Other books in this same series are: - - A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN AFLOAT - A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN CHINA - A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN JAPAN - A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN THE SOUTH SEAS - - - - -FOOTNOTES: - -[1] A lorcha is a Filipino schooner; its sails are usually made of -a rough canvas, yellow in color, manufactured from a native fibre, -usually hemp. - -[2] “Friend, a letter.” - -[3] Pulijanes--ladrones, outlaw - - - - -TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES: - - - Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_. - - Obvious typographical errors have been corrected. - - Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized. - - Archaic or alternate spelling has been retained from the original. - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A UNITED STATES MIDSHIPMAN IN -THE PHILIPPINES *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |